Home

Planet Technology IDL-2402 User's Manual

1. 352 5 18 4 mode Description Syntax Parameter 5 18 5 noise Description Syntax Parameter 5 18 6 noisemargin Description Set Downshift Upshift Noise Margin in downstream upstream Syntax Parameter Set downstream upstream rate adaptive mode to init rate automatically selected at start up only and does not change after that dynamic rate automatically selected at initialization and is continuously adapted during show time or manual rate changed manually mode ds us init dynamic manual None Set downstream upstream minimum impulse noise protection noise ds us lt number gt Name Description number Noise tenth symbols Valid values 0 8 step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory direction noisemargin ds us downshift upshift lt number gt Name Description number Downshift Upshift Noise Margin tenth symbols Valid values 0 31 step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory 353 5 18 7 ra interval Description Set Downshift Upshift Interval in downstream upstream direction Syntax ra interval ds us downshift upshift lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Downshift Upshift interval seconds Valid values 0 16383 Default value 10 Type Mandatory 5 18 8 service name Description Set service profile name Syntax service name lt string gt Param
2. 218 Default value Type Optional 5 3 12 show access list srcmac Description Syntax Parameter Display all source mac address deny access list or by index show access list srcmac lt index gt Name Description lt index gt Source MAC deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 13 show account Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 14 show aging Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 15 show alarm Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 16 show alarm Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 17 show alarm Description Syntax Parameter Display system account list detail information show account detail None Display bridge aging time show aging None current Display current alarm list show alarm current None event Display event list show alarm event None history Display alarm history list show alarm history None 219 5 3 18 show atmdesc Description Display ATM descriptor Syntax show atmdesc Parameter None 5 3 19 show atm loopback Description Display ATM loopback status by port Syntax show atm loopback lt port gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Optional 5 3 20 show cli config Description Display current setting for CLI configuration timeout value session value Syntax show cli config Parameter None 5 3 21 show
3. 40 G Flash Boot Point Configuration Select Click on the Boot Config drop down list and select the partition Partition1 or Partition2 as the boot point Click on Apply button and then restart the system The system will restart and load the configuration in the partition you select into the running configuration Database Configuration DB Contig Select G Flash Boot Point Configuration Select D FLASH DEVICE IMAGE FILE 1 Boot Point Selector System Configuration O IMAGE FILE 2 System Configuration 41 2 3 4 Firmware Update For CLI If you want to update firmware code you must get image file from FTP Server Suppose that FTP Server IP address is 172 16 10 219 and the image filename is vmlinux_u2402_ 1 00B05 Example 1 Firmware update enable go to enable mode configure go to configuration mode firmware login 172 16 10 219 username share password tg123 firmware upgrade vmlinux_u2402_1 00B05 Firmware upgrade may take a few minutes don t turn off or reset the system during the process You can get status using command show firmware status in Enable execution mode exit back to enable mode show firmware status When status returns Upgraded already you can restart the system to run new firmware image Once you upgrade successfully you can t upgrade the second time unless you have restarted the system show firmware partition show partition information
4. 5 4 12 cluster cfg domain Set cluster domain name cluster cfg domain lt string gt Description Description Syntax Parameter Name lt string gt Cluster domain name 249 Valid values max length 31 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 13 cluster cfg management Description Set cluster management IP configuration Syntax cluster cfg management ip lt ipv4 address gt netmask lt netmask gt gateway lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx Xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt netmask gt Netmask of the management port Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value Type Optional 5 4 14 cluster cfg name Description Set the NE name in a cluster Syntax cluster cfg name lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt A name for NE Identification Valid values max length 31 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 15 cluster cfg role Description Set cluster role to System decide or Slave only or Not in a cluster default Syntax cluster cfg role cluster slave only individual Parameter None 250 5 4 16 cluster cfg voting key Description Set cluster voting key for the priority to be a Master Syntax cluster cfg voting key lt number gt Parameter Name Description l
5. txrx_frames_1518 Monitoring tx 1024 to 1518 octets rmon alarm lt index gt variable rx_broadcast rx_bytes rx_dropped rx_err_aligment rx_fragments rx_jabber rx_multicast rx_oversize rx_packets rx_undersize index lt number gt rmon alarm lt index gt variable tx_single_collision txrx_frames_64 txrx_frames_ 127 txrx_frames_255 txrx_frames_511 txrx_frames_1023 txrx_frames_ 1518 index lt number gt Name Description RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory Source index in statistic table lt index gt lt number gt Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 85 rmon event lt index gt community Description Set RMON event community Syntax Parameter rmon event lt index gt community lt string gt Name Description lt index gt RMON event entry index 269 Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt RMON event community Valid values string type value max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 86 rmon event lt index gt delete Description Delete RMON event entry Syntax rmon event lt index gt delete Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 87 rmon event lt index gt description Descriptio
6. 000000nn 226 5 3 43 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us oan 226 5 3 44 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe Us tes 226 5 3 45 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne US ent 227 5 3 46 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us on 227 5 3 47 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us bim 00 227 5 3 48 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us blog 228 5 3 49 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds load 000nnn 228 5 3 50 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds gan 228 5 3 51 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds tSS 0000 229 5 3 52 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl channel sssssssssseeeneeeessesnne 229 5 3 53 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl failure ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 229 5 3 54 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl ne 230 5 3 55 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line confg 230 5 3 56 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line delt jeet 230 5 3 57 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line information s0a00ennne 231 5 3 58 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl inventory ceeeeeeeeeeeees 231 5 3 59 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl operational eeee 231 5 3 60 show interface xdsl
7. Port 01 12 D pvc 1 Di Select the line bridge port range to be listed Select Port Remember to select the checkbox when you want to modify delete the setting of a bridge port or set a bridge port to its default value Supplicant Timeout Type in the number of seconds our system will wait for a response before resending the request to the supplicant Default is 60 sec Server Timeout Type in the number of seconds our system will wait for a reply before resending the response to the authentication server Default is 60 sec Tx Period Type in the number of seconds our system will wait for a response to an EAP request identity frame from the supplicant before resending the request Default is 30 sec ReAuthentication Period Type in the number of seconds between re authentication requests Default is 3600 sec Quiet Period Type in the number of seconds that our system remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange with the supplicant Default is 60 sec 81 4 2 2 RADIUS amp Local Profile The IDL 2402 system supports RADIUS client function for authenticating line ports with local authentication database or remote RADIUS server From the 802 1x Security menu click on RADIUS amp Local Profile The following page is displayed Authentication Method Modify RADIUS amp Local Profile AAA stands for Authentication Authorization and Accounting
8. lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt mac address gt MAC address Valid values xx xx Xx xx xx xx xx 0 ff Default value 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Mandatory 337 5 14 6 dstmac list Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 7 ethertype Description Syntax Parameter Show destination MAC priority list dstmac list None Specify Ether Type of packets to remark vlan priority Show Ether Type priority list entry Disable Ether Type priority list entry ethertype lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt type lt ethertype gt ethertype lt number gt list ethertype lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt ToS IP Precedence priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ethertype gt Ether Type value Valid values 0x0001 Oxffff Default value Typ
9. 5 12 Access List Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the ACL execution mode 5 12 1 bcrate cir Description Broadcast rate limiting CIR and LBS setting Syntax Parameter 5 12 2 bcrate list Description Syntax Parameter 5 12 3 dstmac Description Syntax Parameter bcrate cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt Name Description lt Cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value 80000 Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Leakage Bucket Size millisecond Valid values 1 1024 Default value 80 Type Mandatory Show broadcast rate limiting list bcrate list None Specify destination MAC address of packets to filter Show specified destination MAC deny access list entry Delete specified destination MAC deny access list entry dstmac lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt mac lt mac address gt dstmac lt number gt list dstmac lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Destination MAC deny access list number 316 5 12 4 dstmac list Description Syntax Parameter 5 12 5 dstip Description Syntax Parameter Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Defaul
10. 5 21 8 server lt number gt delete Description Delete a RADIUS server setup in the system Syntax server lt index gt delete Parameter Name Description index RADIUS Server index Valid values 1 3 Default value Type Mandatory 5 21 9 profile delete Description Delete an authentication local profile in the system Syntax profile lt index gt delete Parameter Name Description index Authenticate profile index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 366 5 21 10 profile lt index gt username lt string gt password Description Set the username and password for a authentication local profile Syntax profile lt index gt username lt string gt password lt string gt Parameter Name Description index Authenticate profile index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory string Setting username of Authenticate profile Valid values max 16 character Default value Type Mandatory string Setting password of Authenticate profile Valid values max 16 character Default value Type Mandatory 367 Appendix A ADSL Operational Mask Table Table A 1 ADSL Operational Mask Bit Description Bit Description 0 ANSI_T1 413 32 992 4 AllDigital NonOverlapped 1 ETSI_DTS_TM06006 33 992 4 AllDigital Overlapped 2 992 1 A Pots NonOverla
11. Select the Operational Mode s to be masked Select the modes in Operational Mask Mode the block by using mouse and Shift or Ctrl key Select the check box and then click on Modify button Click on this drop down list and select the carrier data mode Select the check box and then click on Modify button OFF Carrier data wont vary during show time Carrier Data Mode ON Carrier data collection is active The carrier data will be refreshed during show time ON INIT The ADSL facility is re initialized and carrier data collection is active will be refreshed 162 FORCE L3 Mode Click on this drop down list and select ON to force the ADSL port to enter power management L3 mode Idle state Select the check box and then click on Modify button Modify Click on this button to submit modification Query Click on this button to display current line configuration 163 4 4 3 2 Line Information This option allows you to setup the ADSL line information From the ADSL menu click on Line Config amp Info and then Line Information The following page is displayed ADSL Line Information ADSL Port from 1 io 5 Modify Query ADSL 1 886 32826433 Mak Office ADSL Line Information Label Description ADSL Port From To Type in the line port range Valid number 1 24 Click on this button to submit the modification once you have entered new Modif
12. The commands in this section can be executed only in the Alarm Profile execution mode 5 15 1 alarm mask Description Mask the alarm Syntax alarm mask lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt Name of alarm Valid values Refer to Appendix B Alarm Table Default value Type Mandatory 5 15 2 alarm unmask Description Unmask the alarm Syntax alarm unmask lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt Name of alarm Valid values Refer to Appendix B Alarm Table Default value Type Mandatory 5 15 3 alarm major Description Set the level of the alarm to Major Syntax alarm major lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt Name of alarm Valid values Refer to Appendix B Alarm Table Default value Type Mandatory 346 5 15 4 alarm minor Description Set the level of the alarm to Minor Syntax alarm minor lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt Name of alarm Valid values Refer to Appendix B Alarm Table Default value Type Mandatory 347 5 16 IGMP ACL Profile Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the IGMP ACL Profile execution mode 5 16 1 igmp acl Description IGMP group ACL Setting IP and VLAN Delete channel setting Syntax igmp acl lt number gt lt ipv4 address gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt delete Parameter Name De
13. Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional number Destination IP address priority list number 5 3 80 show priority list dstmac Description Syntax Parameter Display destination MAC address priority list show priority list dstmac lt number gt Name Description Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional number Destination MAC address priority list number 5 3 81 show priority list ethertype Description Syntax Parameter Display specific Ether Type VLAN priority list show priority list ethertype lt number gt Name Description Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional number Ether Type priority list number 5 3 82 show priority list ipprotocol Description Syntax Parameter Display IP Protocol VLAN priority list show priority list ipprotocol lt number gt Name Description Valid values 1 256 number IP Protocol VLAN priority list number 237 Default value Type Optional 5 3 83 show priority list srcip Description Display source IP address priority list Syntax show priority list srcip lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Source IP address priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 84 show priority list srcmac Description Display source MAC address priority list Syntax show priority li
14. Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 117 Ether Type Los z cica DN Next No 2 Incoming EtherType Ox Priority ut zl Create VLAN Priority Remark YPRI Remark 10 Ether Type Remark D No From 1 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN J VLAN Priority Remark Setup Ether Type Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 Query To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to retrieve Delete To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete orca D cicat D Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Incoming EtherType Type in the EtherType value hexadecimal Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 118 4 3 3 3 Rate Limit This option allows you to limit the rate of broadcast multicast packets that are received on a VLAN and configure the Three Color Marking TCM Policer profile From the Bridge menu click on Access Control and then Rate Limit The following page is displayed
15. Label Description Rate Limit Type Click on this drop down list and select the item you want to setup Once you have finished setting the parameter values click on this button to Modify submit the modification Query Click on this button to get most recent data Color aware mode the packets are classified before they re sent through the policer Color Aware Color blind mode the packets are directed through the entire policer regardless of their color There are two fields you can select for determining the packet s input color the Color Field VLAN priority bits within the Ethernet header or the DSCP field within the IP header This parameter defines the action for non conforming packets You can choose Packet Mode Tag or Discard If Tag is chosen then all the packets will be marked as red in the Color field rather than be discarded 124 Type in the green color value that is used when determining a packet s input color Green Value for Color Aware mode or remarking a packet s output color as green Valid value is 0 7 for VLAN Priority color field or 0 63 for DSCP color field Type in the yellow color value that is used when determining a packet s input Yellow Value color for Color Aware mode or remarking a packet s output color as yellow Valid value is 0 7 for VLAN Priority color field or 0 63 for DSCP color field Red Value Type in the red color value that is used
16. lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt tos gt Incoming Type of Service Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 343 5 14 16 tos list Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 17 vlanid Description Syntax Parameter Show ToS IP Precedence priority list tos list None Specify VLAN ID of packets to remark VLAN priority Show VLAN id priority list entry Disable VLAN id priority list entry vianid lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt vlanid lt numbers gt list vlanid lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Vlan id priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID number Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 344 5 14 18 vianid list Description Show VLAN id priority list Syntax vianid list Parameter None 345 5 15 Alarm Profile Mode Commands
17. 159 4 4 2 4 OP Data This option allows you to view the ADSL line channel operational data and carrier data From the ADSL menu click on Data amp Inventory and then OP Data The following page is displayed Line Operational Data Click on ADSL OP Data drop down list and select the item Line OP Then select the line port 1 24 Click on Query button ADSL Line Operational Data ADSL OP Data Line OP D Port 1 D Query ADSL LIHE OP Data HE US ADSL LINE OP Data ADSL LINE OP Data 160 Channel Operational Data Click on ADSL OP Data drop down list and select the item Channel OP Then select the port 1 24 Click on Query button The following page is displayed ADSL Channel Operational Data ADSL OP Data Channel OP D Port 1 D Query ADSL LIHE OP Data HE US FE DS ADSL LIHE OP Data 161 4 4 3 Line Config amp Info 4 4 3 1 Line Configuration This option allows you to setup the ADSL line configuration From the ADSL menu click on Line Config amp Info and then Line Configuration The following page is displayed ADSL Line Configuration ADSL Port a tof Modify MANSI _T1413 a ETS _DTS_TMO6006 Operational Mask Mode D 2 992 1_4_Pots_NonOverlapped zl Carrier Data Mode T 1 OFF sl FORCE L3 Mode Joer x ADSL Port 9 II Query ADSL Line Configuration Label Description ADSL Port From To Type in the line port range Valid number 1 24
18. Current Version 1 00B05 Partition Version Date Status 1 1 00B05 2007 07 05 2 1 00B05 2007 07 10 Active Note the Active status of the firmware partition information means the active partition for next time restart not current running partition You can see which partition is current running partition by referring to the Current Version 2 The IDL 2402 provides two firmware memory partitions If you want to change the firmware partition for booting use the following commands if you change to the non active partition system will restart immediately enable go to enable mode configure go to configuration mode firmware partition lt number gt select partition 1 or 2 for next power on 42 For Web On the menu tree click on Maintenance gt Firmware Update The Firmware Update page is displayed Once you have entered all the necessary values click on Firmware Update button to start updating the firmware ymlinux_u2402_ 1 0080 e See an operator can use Partition Select from 1 to 2 vice versa g Parition changes from version 4 a to version B b 00805 1 Warning Upgrading firmware may take a few minutes please don t turn off or reset the system 2 0nce the system has upgraded already please restart it _ e gg Label Description Firmware Update Once you have typed in the parameter values click on this button to start firmware update Remote FTP Server IP Type in
19. Next No 2 Source MAC foo foo foo foo foo foo Priority Out zl Create GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN J VLAN Priority Remark Setup MAC Source Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 Query To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to retrieve Delete To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA orca Di oa DN bridge port Source MAC Type in the MAC Address of the coming source Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 111 MAC Destination eca z cicat D Next No 2 VLAN MAC Destination Priority Remark VER Remark 5 MAC Destination zl No From No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Destination mac 00 00 fo foo o foo Priority out zl Create GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN J VLAN Priority Remark Setup MAC Destination Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is
20. Parameter None 5 8 2 default vian Description Set default VLAN ID for a bridge port Syntax default vlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value 1 Type Mandatory 5 8 3 default prio Description Set default priority value for a bridge port Syntax default prio lt prio ID gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 8 4 egress Description Default PVID egress taged untagged setting Syntax egress tag untag Parameter None 302 5 8 5 ingress Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 6 isolation Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 7 link mode Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 8 max mac Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 9 priority regen Enable disable ingress filter mode ingress enable disable None Enable Disable default PVID isolation setting isolation disable None Set link mode uplink mode or user mode link mode uplink user None Set the maximum users allowed to access Internet based on user MAC address counter on per ATM PVC basis max mac lt number gt Name Description Maximum number of the MAC addresses Valid values 1 4096 for GBE interface 1 128 for ADSL interface lt number gt Default value 0 Type Mandatory Description VLAN priority value rege
21. pdt GMT 07 00 Pacific Daylight Time cst GMT 06 00 Central Standard Time mdt GMT 06 00 Mountain Daylight Time est GMT 05 00 Eastan Standard Time cdt GMT 05 00 Central Daylight Time ast GMT 04 00 Atlantic Standard Time edt GMT 04 00 Eastan Daylight Time nst GMT 03 30 Newfoundland Standard Time adt GMT 03 00 Altantic Daylight Time bst GMT 03 00 Brazil Standard Time gst GMT 03 00 Greenland Standard Time at GMT 02 00 Azores Time wat GMT 01 00 West Africa Time gmt GMT Greenwich Mean Time wet GMT 00 00 Western European Time ut GMT 00 00 Universal Time utc GMT 00 00 Universal Time cet GMT 01 00 Central European Time met GMT 01 00 Middle European Time mewt GMT 01 00 Middle Eruopean Winter Time swt GMT 01 00 Swedish Winter Time fwt GMT 01 00 French Winter Time eet GMT 02 00 Eastean European Time mest GMT 02 00 Middle European Summer Time fst GMT 02 00 French Summer Time es GMT 02 00 Egypt Standard Time ed GMT 03 00 Egypt Daylight Time bt GMT 03 00 Baghdad Time it GMT 03 30 Iran Time zp4 GMT 04 00 GMT Plus 4 Hours zp5 GMT 05 00 GMT Plus 5 Hours ist GMT 05 30 Indian Standard Time zp6 GMT 06 00 GMT Plus 6 Hours sst GMT 07 00 South Smatra Time wast GMT 07 00 West Australian Standard Time jt GMT 07 30 Java Time cct GMT 08 00 China Coast Time hst GMT 08 00 HongKong Standard Time 283 wadt wst jst kst cast sast jdt gst ea
22. previous input Terminal Key Function Following is the list of all the terminal keys and their function Table 5 1 List of Terminal Keys TAB Attempt to perform completion on the text before point TAB TAB Display the next keyword of this command Display help of command ENTER Execute input DEL or BACKSPACE Delete the character to the left of the cursor UP Arrow History of last input line DOWN Arrow History of previous input Line Delete the character at point If point is at the beginning of the CTRL d line there are no characters in the line and the last character typed was not bound to delete char then return EOF CTRL a Move to the start of the line CTRL e Move to the end of the line CTRL f Move Forward one character CTRL b Move Back one character CTRL c Force to interrupt CTRL k Kill the text from the current cursor to the end CTRL p aoe pert through the history list fetching the previous CTRL n pore rowel through the history list fetching the next CTRL r Search backward starting at the current line and moving up through the history as necessary This is an incremental search 209 Drag the character before the cursor forward over the character at the cursor moving the cursor forward as well If the insertion GIL point is at the end of the line this transposes the last two characters of the line Negative arguments have no ef
23. pve 1 x Click on the drop down lists to select port range and PVC 1 8 Click on this button to create a loopback setting Create Note make sure the interface has been setup and the service state of the circuit is turned on Query Click on this button to query the loopback status Delete Click on this button to delete a loopback entry Select Click on the checkbox to select the PVC you want to create or delete the loopback setting for Port This field shows the line port and PVC number LoopBack ID Type in a loopback ID 32 digit Test Type Select the loopback type F5 E2E or F5 Segment This field shows current loopback testing status Possible values are Status Fail Success In Progress or 183 4 7 5 Fault Management 4 7 5 1 Alarm Event This option allows you to query current alarm history alarm and event log From the Maintenance menu click on Fault Management and then Alarm Event The Current Alarm page is displayed Click on the Alarm Event Select drop down list and select Current Alarm History Alarm or Event Log to view Current Alarm Type in the range of rows 1 1024 and then click on the Query button Current Alarm AlarmEvent Select Current Alarm D Row Form fi To b No range from1to1024 Query Current Alarm Table Label Description Query Click on this button to get most recent data Row This field shows
24. 1 tea Profile 1 a Modify The Service Profile range from 1 to 120 The Spectrum Profile range from 1 to 120 The TCA Profile range from 1 to 64 Port 01 12 D Query eeereeeeeee e SERVICE PROFILE SPECTRUM PROFILE TCA PROFILE Table 0 1 ADSL Circuit Setup Label Description z Click on the drop down list and select the Administrative status ON OFF or Admin RESET Service Profile Type in the index of the Service Profile 1 120 Spectrum Profile Type in the index of the Spectrum Profile 1 120 65 TCA Profile Type in the index of the TCA Profile 1 64 All Select the check box to select all circuits of current page Modify Click on this button to submit the modification Query Click on this button to get most recent status of the circuits Select Click on the radio button to select the port to be modified Current Status This field shows the operational status of the line ports Possible values are ON enabled OFF disabled and Testing in loop testing now 66 4 1 5 CLI Setup This option allows you to modify the timeout setting for a CLI session and the allowable number of CLI sessions From the System menu click on CLI Setup CLI Setup Default Modify CLI Session range from 1 to vol CLI Timeout range from 180 to 3600 20 CLI Setup Label Description CLI Session Allowable number of CLI sessions at the same tim
25. 225 225 226 224 225 225 225 225 214 216 224 222 209 210 222 224 222 220 220 219 216 214 212 210 200 32 65 ap n WN 195 139 199 192 192 192 192 190 190 190 195 190 193 190 199 19 195 195 199 195 195 195 199 195 195 195 195 195 194 G95 9 a 194 1A 195 194 194 194 194 194 192 182 182 182 12 182 192 192 192 192 19 142 174 190 190 19 19 19 19 19 190 8 127 emma me 190 17a 182 ma 17a 17a mm 17a 17a 179 17a 17a 17a 17a 17a 17a 179 190 17a 190 179 179 179 179 179 1 153 aa 179 173 173 173 176 176 176 179 173 173 173 173 179 176 17a 179 17a 173 17a 17a 179 176 173 176 17a 17a 179 176 9 173 150 191 em 179 176 176 179 173 176 173 176 173 176 176 176 179 176 179 176 176 176 176 176 179 176 176 176 176 179 176 179 176 176 192 2233 176 176 175 176 174 176 175 176 176 176 175 176 176 174 173 175 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 a 224 255 176 176 179 176 176 174 De 179 176 176 176 176 174 179 176 176 179 176 173 179 179 176 176 17a 173 176 179 179 179 176 179 255 207 173 173 180 19 180 179 180 180 182 190 iL 19 180 1980 19 180 187 180 19 180 180 180 190 191 19 19 97 1 19 i iw mw 233 319 187 182 191 iL 187 iL iL iL iN 12 1M 1M L L L 1M 1M L L iM L L WH 19 iW 1 L Ww 19 wm im w 320 351 182 i i 181 182 L L L 182 18 L 184 18 92 L L 187 182 L 197 L 182 mm L 14 1M 1 1M iM i i mM 352 3 i i iL iL 1 amp 2 iL 1M L 180 L 1M L L 12 1M L 18 1M L iM L L L iM iM 1H IM iW L iH ik iM 156
26. AC PWR AC Power cord plug in 100 240VAC is allowed Gigabit Ethernet port 10 100 1000Mbps auto negotiaiton auto MDI RS 232 port for system configuration and maintenance Default settings 9600 8 N 1 Uplink Port Console Port PHONE RJ 21 connector for connecting POTS lines LINE RJ 21 connector for connecting DSL lines 1 5 Technical Specifications IP DSLAM IDL 2402 Hardware Specification 1 5U high box type with a rack mountable enclosure Uplink 1 x RJ 45 10 100 1000Base T Console RS 232 Serial Port 9600 8 N 1 LINE 1 x RJ 21 Connector PHONE 1 x RJ 21 Connector LED Indicators 1x SYS LED 1 x ALM LED 1 x Uplink LED 24 x ADSL LEDs Software Specification Compliant with ADSL standard ANSI T1 413 issue 2 Gdmt ITU G 992 1 Glite ITU G 992 2 Ghs ITU G 994 1 Capable of ADSL2 standard G dmt bis ITU G 992 3 Capable of ADSL2 standard Gdmt bisplus ITU G 992 5 Subscriber interface with built in POTS splitter Downstream DMT data rate up to 25 Mbps Upstream DMT data rate up to 3 Mbps Annex M Distance up to 18 kft 8 PVCs per xDSL port DHCP forward DHCP relay agent PPPoE relay IPSec L2TP PPTP VPN pass through function PPPoA to PPPoE inter working Bridge Function Supports IPv4 packet Supports IEEE802 1d Ethernet bridge function between trunk Ether port and
27. Click on the Rate Limit Type drop down list and select the item you want to setup Rate Limit Select Rate Limit Typel Select DN H Rate Limit Broadcast Rate Limit Broadcast Rate Limit Typel Broadcast D Committed information Rate 80000 1536 1000000000 Bits sec ucket2O 1 1024 Mill sec _Mogity _ Query Rate Limit Broadcast Setup Label Description Rate Limit Type Click on this drop down list and select the item you want to setup Committed Information Rate 1536 1G bits per second The threshold oii ed ea oma onal rate to turn on the rate limit mechanism Leaky bucket size The unit is millisecond This parameter ranges from 1 Leaky Bucket to 1024 The bucket depth is the product of CIR and this parameter Modify Click on this button to modify data in the table Que Click on this button to get most recent status ry 119 H Rate Limit Flooding Rate Limit Flooding Rate Limit Type Flooding Se Flooding vol Committed Information Ratel 80000 1536 1000000000 Bits sec eet 1 1024 Mili sec Rate Limit Flooding Setup Label Description Rate Limit Type Click on this drop down list and select the item you want to setup Flooding VID Type in VLAN ID 1 4094 The VLAN must have been created in the static VLAN table Committed Information Rate Committed Information Rate 1536 1G bits per second The threshold rate to turn
28. DB Config Select C Export File Put Running Config To Remote TFTP Server D TFTP Server pp 172 16 10 241 File Name config Put File TFTP put file fail Database Configuration DB Config Select C Export File Put Running Config To Remote TFTP Server D TFTP Server pe 172 16 10 28 File Name foonfig Put File 176 D Save Running Config to Flash System Config Click on the drop down list and select partition and then click on Write_Running button to write running configuration to Flash Database Configuration DB Contig Select D Save Running Config to Flash System Config ite flash at Partition D Wirte_Running Write running config to Flash successfully Database Configuration DB Contig Select D Save Running Config to Flash System Config e te flash al Partition zl Wirte_Running E Reload Flash to Running Config Click on the drop down list and select partition and then click on LOAD_FLASH button to load configuration from Flash to Running Config Database Configuration DB Contig Select E Reload FLASH System Config to Running Config PS Load flash at Partition DI LOAD_FLASH Load configuration from Flash to Running Config successfully Database Configuration DB Contig Select E Reload FLASH System Config to Running Config Ge Load flash at Partition DI LOAD_FLASH 177 F Restore Factory Default Click on Factory_Default button
29. Default 1 second The Older Host Present Interval It represents how long a host must wait BC 1 500 s after hearing a Version 1 Query before it may send any IGMPv2 messages Default is 400 sec MRT 1 500 s The burstiness of IGMP traffic is inversely proportional to the Max Response Time A longer Max Response Time will soread Report messages over a longer interval However a longer Max Response Time in Group Specific and Source and Group Specific Queries extends the leave latency The leave latency is the time between when the last member stops listening to a source or group and when the traffic stops flowing Value range is 1 500 Default is 10 LMQT 1 500 s The Last Member Query Interval is the Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into Group Specific Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages It is also the Max Response Time used in calculating the Max Resp Code for Group and Source Specific Query messages Value range is 1 500 Default is 1 GMT 1 500 s Read only value The Group Membership Interval is the amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more members of a group or a particular source on a network This value MUST be the Robustness Variable times the Query Interval plus one Query Response Interval GIGA1 Click on this radio button to select GBE Route Port VID Type in the VID you want to setup delete the r
30. Description Syntax Parameter 5 1 2 cluster Description Syntax Parameter 5 1 3 cluster local Description Syntax Parameter 5 1 4 disable Description Syntax Parameter 5 1 5 end Description Syntax Parameter 5 1 6 exit Description Syntax Parameter Exit bye None Switch to a NE network element in the cluster cluster lt string gt Name Description lt string gt NE name in the cluster you want to switch to Valid values string type value Default value Type Mandatory Switch to Master in the cluster cluster local None Go to Disable execution mode from logoff mode disable None Return to Enable mode end None Go to previous execution mode exit None 212 5 1 7 help Description Display help Syntax help Parameter None 5 1 8 list Description Display all commands of current mode Syntax list Parameter None 5 1 9 list opmode Description List all the ADSL modes of operation Syntax list opmode Parameter None 5 1 10 system contact Description Set system contact Syntax system contact lt contact gt Parameter Name Description lt contact gt System contact Valid values string type value Max 63 characters Default value Type Optional 5 1 11 system location Description Set system location Syntax system location lt location gt Parameter Name Description lt location gt System location Valid values st
31. Description Delete account Syntax account delete lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt ID name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 4 account modify Description Modify account Syntax account modify lt name gt comment lt comment gt account modify lt name gt password lt password gt level lt level gt comment lt comment gt comment lt comment gt password expiration lt day number gt account modify lt name gt level lt level gt comment lt comment gt account modify lt name gt password expiration lt day number gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt ID name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt password gt Input password max 31 characters Default value space char Type Optional lt level gt Set access level Valid values superuser engineer guest Default value guest Type Optional lt comment gt Set comment max 31 characters Default value space char Type Optional day number Set password expiration days 0 disable 247 Default value Type Optional 5 4 5 aging Description Bridge aging time Syntax aging lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Aging time sec Valid values 10 1000000 sec Default value 300 Type Mandatory 5 4 6 alarm event clear Description Clear alarm event log Syntax alarm event clear
32. IGMP Group List by Number Label Description No From To Type in the entry number range in the table Query Click on this button to display the table entries List by VID amp Group IP IGMP Group Senn Se 3 List by VID amp Group IP v VD 1001 GroupiP 23001 IGMP Group List by VID A Group IP Label Description VID Type in the VLAN ID 1 4094 Group IP Type in the IGMP group IP address Query Click on this button to display the table entries 136 IGMP Type gt Source This option allows you to query the Source IP which is the IP address of the source that is joining a multicast group on an interface This option is available only when IGMP version 3 is selected for the system s IGMP configuration refer to section 4 3 6 IGMP Source D 1001 GroupiP 224 0 0 11 No From 1 IGMP Source Label Description VID Type in the VLAN ID 1 4094 Group IP Type in the IGMP group IP address No From To Type in the entry number range in the table Query Click on this button to display the table entries 137 4 3 7 IPOA 4 3 7 1 BRAS MAC The IDL 2402 supports an IPOA IPOE IWF Interworking Function This option allows you to setup the BRAS MAC address that is used by the IPOA IPOE IWF From the Bridge menu click on POA and then BRAS MAC The following page is displayed To add modify a MAC Select a checkbox beside an in
33. Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt 5 13 2 no atmdesc Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory Description Delete ATM Description Syntax no atmdesc lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt ATM Description number Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory 326 5 13 3 ubr1 Description Syntax Parameter 5 13 4 ubr2 Description Syntax Parameter UBR type 1 traffic setting atmNoClpNoScrCdvt ubr1 lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory UBR type 2 traffic setting atmNoClp TaggingNoScr ubr2 lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
34. Parameter None 5 4 39 igmp deny no router alert Description Enable or disable the function that the system will deny IGMP packets that have no router alert option in their IP header Default is disable the system doesn t care router alert option Syntax igmp deny no router alert enable disable Parameter None 5 4 40 igmp disable Description Disable snooping mode and proxy mode Syntax igmp disable Parameter None 5 4 41 igmp max group limit Description Enable or disable the function that maximum active counter of IGMP groups can be joined for every bridge port will be limited Syntax igmp max group limit enable disable Parameter None 256 5 4 42 igmp proxy Description Enable GMP proxy snooping mode Syntax igmp proxy Parameter None 5 4 43 igmp snooping Description Enable IGMP normal snooping mode Syntax igmp snooping Parameter None 5 4 44 igmp rtport gigabit Description Set IGMP router port giga1 and set IGMP router IP address Syntax igmp rtport gigabit lt port gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable ip lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 Default value Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Set router IP address for proxy mode IGMP general query packet reference Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Option
35. Query Delete eia z cica D Next No 2 Source MAC foo foo foo foo foo o Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN J Source MAC Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here No From To Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number value 1 256 Query Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to display the filter rules Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter rules in the table Japs DN Port 1 z Pvc 1 DN Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Source MAC Type in the MAC Address of the source Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 101 IP Address Filtering Source IP Address Filtering Filtering Typel Source IP D No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Next No 3 souwceP 0 P P P mip fo fo fo Create Source IP Address Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type No From To You can also select the filtering type here Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number value 1 256 Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to auey display the filter rules
36. Rx BroadcastPkts Monitoring rx broadcast packets Rx MulticastPkts Monitoring rx multicast packets Rx CRC Align Errors Monitoring rx error aligment packets Rx Undersize Pkts Monitoring rx undersize packets Rx Oversize Pkts Monitoring rx oversize packets Rx Fragments Monitoring rx fragments packets Rx Jabbers Monitoring rx jabber packets Tx Collisions Monitoring tx single collision packets Tx Rx Pkts 64bytes Monitoring tx rx 64 bytes Tx Rx Pkts 65 127bytes Monitoring tx rx 65 to 127 bytes Tx Rx Pkts 128 255bytes Monitoring tx rx 128 to 255 bytes Tx Rx Pkts 256 511bytes Monitoring tx rx 256 to 511 bytes Tx Rx Pkts 512 1023bytes Monitoring tx rx 512 to 1023 bytes Tx Rx Pkts 1024 1518bytes Monitoring tx rx 1024 to 1518 bytes Tx Bytes Monitoring tx bytes packets Tx Packet Monitoring tx packets Tx MulticastPkts Monitoring tx multicast packets Tx BroadcastPkts Monitoring tx broadcast packets 195 History Control This table is for controlling the ETH History table see next section History Control 1 is for controlling ETH History table 1 History Control 2 is for controlling ETH History table 2 etc Type in the Requested value and Interval Sec and then click on New to create a History Control entry Up to 10 History Control entries can be created To modify an entry click on the index to select
37. Static MAC forwarding table number Valid values 1 512 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 253 lt mac address gt MAC address Valid values xx Xx xx Xx xx xx xx 00 ff Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 30 fdbstatic lt number gt disable Description Disable specify static MAC forwarding entry Syntax fdbstatic lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Static MAC forwarding table number Valid values 1 512 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 31 fdbstatic list Description Show static MAC forwarding table or specified static MAC forwarding entry Syntax fdbstatic lt numbers list Parameter Name Description lt number gt Static MAC forwarding table number Valid values 1 512 Default value Type Optional 5 4 32 firmware bootcode upgrade Description Get bootcode from FTP server and write to Flash ROM Syntax firmware bootcode upgrade lt filename gt Parameter Name Description lt filename gt Boot code path and file name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 254 5 4 33 firmware login L
38. Type Mandatory 278 5 4 111 sntp polling interval Description Set SNTP polling interval Syntax snip polling interval lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Polling interval in seconds Valid values 60 65535 Default value 600 Type Mandatory 5 4 112 sntp server address Description Set SNTP server ip address Syntax snmp server address lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IP address of SNTP server Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory 5 4 113 syslog server Description Set system log server Syntax syslog server lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt Syslog server IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory 5 4 114 tem color aware Description Set Color Aware or Color Blind TCM Policer Syntax tcm color aware aware blind Parameter None 279 5 4 115 tcm color field Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 116 tcm green Description Syntax Parameter Set TCM color field to be VLAN priority or DSCP tcm color field vprio dscp None Set TCM green color value tcm green lt number gt Name Description lt number gt TCM green color value Valid values 0 7 for VLAN priority color field 0 63 for DSCP color field Default value 1 Type Manda
39. WFQ Configurable mapping function between ATM PVC and 802 1p priority queue Supports IP CoS technology Web based GUI management Local RS 232 CLI and Ethernet SNMP Telnet SSH management Remote in band SNMP Telnet SSH management Firmware upgradeable via FTP SNMP v1 v2c 21 2 Installation The followings are instructions for setting up the IDL 2402 Refer to the illustration and follow the simple steps below to quickly install your IP DSLAM 2 1 Safety Instruction The following is the safety instructions for IP DSLAM before installing gt gt The maximum operating temperature of the IP DSLAM is 65 C Care must be taken gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt to allow sufficient air circulation or space between units when the IP DSLAM is installed inside a closed rack assembly and racks should safely support the combined weight of all IP DSLAM The connections and equipment that supply power to the IP DSLAM should be capable of operating safely with the maximum power requirements of the IP DSLAM In the event of a power overload the supply circuits and supply wiring should not become hazardous The AC power cord must plug into the right supply voltage Make sure that the supplied AC voltage is correct and stable If the input AC voltage is over 10 lower than the standard may cause the IP DSLAM to malfunction Generally when installed after the final configuration the p
40. ee 261 5 4 60 priority queue atm priority ghet eege ees 261 5 4 61 priority queue atm OuUee weight 261 5 4 62 priority queue atm Queue weight 262 5 4 63 priority queue atm OUeUe iweght 262 5 4 64 priority queue atm OUeUeiweght 262 5 4 65 priority queue atm scheduling unn 262 5 4 66 priority queue gigabit Priority ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 263 5 4 67 profile alarm EE 263 5 4 68 Provile 1QMP aCl DEEN 263 D469 ROTC service AOS EE 263 5 4 70 profile spectrum E 264 5 4 71 profile tca EE eege ee 264 5 472 profile rate NIM EE 264 5 4 73 remotecfg EE eege gegegegegeggeggegegege egedegegegdegdegededeegceEegegegegegdN 265 54 74 TEEN sees Sates sarc vale EE 265 5 4 75 rmon alarm lt index gt alamm Irtenva 265 5 4 76 rmon alarm lt index gt delete cccccceceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 266 5 4 77 rmon alarm lt index gt falling eventndex ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 266 5 4 78 rmon alarm lt index gt falling_threShold cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 266 5 4 79 rmon alarm lt iNdex gt owner EEN 267 5 4 80 rmon alarm lt index gt rising_eventindeX eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 267 5 4 81 rmon alarm lt index gt rising jhreshold 267 5 4 82 rmon alarm lt index gt sample pe 268 5 4 83 rmon alarm lt index gt startup aam ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 268 5 4 84 rmon alarm lt index gt variable 2 ceee
41. line mode diagnostic init off None 5 10 3 line mode force I3 Description Syntax Parameter Set force to power management L3 mode or not line mode force l3 on off None 5 10 4 line mode mask Description Syntax Parameter Set Clear xDSL line Operational mode mask line mode mask set clear lt opmode ID gt Name Description lt opmode id gt The ID of allowed ADSL modes of operation Valid values Use list op mode command to see all the operation modes Or refer to Table A 1 Default value Type Mandatory 310 5 10 5 line port Description Set xDSL line port information Syntax line port id lt id gt description lt desc gt phone lt phone numbers Parameter Name Description lt id gt Line ID name max 32 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt desc gt Line port description max 48 character Default value Type Mandatory lt phone Phone number max 32 characters number gt Valid values no limit format Default value Type Mandatory 5 10 6 line profile Description Create xDSL line profile Syntax line profile service spectrum tca lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Profile index Valid values 1 120 1 64 for tca profile Default value Type Mandatory 5 10 7 line status service Description Set xDSL line service status service ON
42. lt VLAN ID gt disable Description Syntax Parameter Delete a VLAN from memberset table vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 308 5 9 13 vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 9 14 vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority Description Set VLAN memberset priority specify priority level or reserved the original priority tag or untag enable or disable port isolation Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority lt prio ID gt reserved tag untag isolation disable Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 9 15 vian list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan list Parameter None 309 5 10 ADSL Configure Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the ADSL Config mode 5 10 1 line mode carrier Description Syntax Parameter Set Clear xDSL line carrier line mode carrier on off oninit None 5 10 2 line mode diagnostic Description Syntax Parameter Set Clear xDSL line diagnostics
43. only the PM counter of a higher ranking alarm will count the PM counters of other lower ranking alarms will not System Alarms The IDL 2402 provides the following System alarms Fan Failure Alarm Above Temperature Below Temperature Self test Fail DSP Fail you can see which DSP chip is fail from the user interface Web GUI CLI etc There is a number 1 4 in the alarm message description corresponding to the DSP chip 1 chip 4 54 ADSL Alarms The IDL 2402 provides the following ADSL alarms LOS Loss of Signal Near End Far End LOF Loss of Frame Near End Far End LOM Loss of Margin Near End Far End LCD Loss of Cell Delineation Near End Far End NCD No Cell Delineation Near End Far End LOPWR Loss of Power Far End COMMF Unable to communicate with peer modem Far End NOPEER No peer present Far End 55 3 5 Loopback Testing The IDL 2402 supports ATM and ADSL loop diagnostics ATM The system provides F5 end to end or segment loopback ADSL The system provides Dual Ended Loop Testing DELT for each ADSL line on a per port basis according to the definition per section 8 12 3 of ITUT G992 3 The following test parameters are supported Channel Characteristics Function H f per subcarrier CCF ps Quiet Line Noise PSD QLN f per subcarrier QLN ps Signal to Noise Ratio SNR f per subcarrier SNR ps Line Attenuation LATN Signal Attenuation SATN Sign
44. 1 256 Query To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to retrieve Delete To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete orca D cicat D Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Destination MAC Type in the MAC Address of the destination Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 112 VLAN ID VLAN ID Priority Remark PRI Remark 6DYLAN ID S No From No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete eca z cicat D VLAN ID 1 Priority out zl Create GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup VLAN ID Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this ue SE button to retrieve Delete To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA orca D cicat D REECH VLAN ID Type in the VLAN ID 1 4094 Priority Out Click on the drop down list and s
45. 6 gt grp GRP Globin Reduction Protocol lt gt igp IGP Any private interior gateway lt 9 gt udp UDP User Datagram lt 17 gt gre GRE General Routing Encapsulation lt 47 gt eigrp EIGRP lt 88 gt ospf OSPF lt 89 gt Default value Type Mandatory 321 5 12 12 ipprotocol list Description Syntax Parameter 5 12 13 l4dstport Description Syntax Parameter Display IP protocol deny access list ipprotocol list None Specify L4 dest port of packets to reject Show specify L4 dest port access list entry Delete specify L4 dest port deny access list entry l4dstport lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt port lt port number gt l4dstport lt numbers gt list l4dstport lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt L4 dest port deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt port number gt L4 destination port number Valid values 1 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 322 5 12 14 l4dstport list Description Display L4 dest port deny access list Syntax 4dstport list Parameter None 5 12 15 mcfldrate list Description Display flooding rate limiting list Sy
46. EE 303 EE 303 EENEG 303 SUE 303 5 8 9 Priority rege DE 303 EE 304 5 8 Wl tem policer iaiia aiiai aa iiai 304 5 8 12 vlan lt VLAN ID gt CiSablei tasters Anise arta eee ease tedes 304 DOr E E EC RR EE 305 5 8 14 vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority EEN 305 ef ora Eo RE RI 305 5 9 GBE LA Bridge Mode CommandS eccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 306 59 0 03 EE 306 Be COSTA UIE Va EE 306 5 9 3 default NO EE 306 EIERE 306 5 9 5 e Sinner ana A E ttiotal at hata total SAR 307 EE 307 Dia IK IOUS Jie Asta Se Cates Coe Se en a ee tele ean 307 5 9 9 MAX MaA Cinisi ENEE ENEE EEN EENS 307 EELER eeg 307 le EE 308 EE Ee 308 5 9 12 vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable ceeeeseseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteseeeeneeeeeeeneeeneeas 308 SIT Maine VEAN DS EE 309 5 9 14 vlan lt VLAN IDs priority tlie eee eed a a ae 309 E EE AT 309 5 10 ADSL Configure Mode Commande cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 310 12 5 10 1 line mode carrier 20 2 ccc ceceecceeccecceecceccececeeceeceeeceeceecaeeceeceeseeceeeateneeeaees 310 LOZ MIMS MOOS MAGNO e 310 5 10 3 line mode force l3 EE 310 5 10 4 line mode mask en 310 STO DNE POM e a delat ictal a 311 5110 6 line profile EE 311 5 10 7 line status EE 311 5 11 IPoA Configure Mode Commands cccccceeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 312 STA Eege 312 KE ENEE 312 5 113 COMOMY wet eege 312 ACV Ne sea A hn hala tal Cea a OLR a stn 313 Deb ety poa SLATS watered Caiedoes Co
47. Filtering Filtering Typel Destination IP D No From No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL D Port 1 sllpvc3 x Next No 2 Destination IP 0 D P P msp fo fo fo Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Destination IP Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here No From To Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number value 1 256 Query Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to display the filter rules Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter rules in the table aos Di Port 1 slpvc3 DN Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Destination IP Type in the Destination IP address MASK Type in the subnet mask Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 104 Destination MAC Filtering Destination MAC Filtering Filtering Typel Destination MAC x No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL D Port 1 y pve x Next No 2 Destination mac 00 00 fo foo o o Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Destination MAC Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here No Fro
48. G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G e GG GG G G G G GG 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 oft tfiolgeioleiolceiolefiofofo BiG GG G G G G G G G l o GG G G G m G G G G G o G G G G G G G G amp G G G ao biG Gb G G G G G G G 5 2 Ka G P Ka K e E Ki E a 13 ib 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 13 9 tlelglelglel gle E E E E 0j0j0f0of0jojoja j9 f1 11 12 15 15 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 14 14 13 12 11 111 9 Oiototototototototiotototototoatoiotoatototototoiotoatotototototioig 158 Port 2 zl TypeLoap GAN Query The GAIN formula gain value 1 512 The GAIN allocation over the Downstream passband Near END 0j0oj0ojojojaoajojaojojaojaojojaojaojajaojojaojaojaojaojaoajojojojojojojaojojojo Q 482 394 469 541 455 541 489 573 495 G25 394 405 455 590 541 482 442 590 541 A7 455 625 405 S41 5ii 482 459 455 609 413 573 482 526 496 442 442 489 455 AID 442 442 442 419 419 419 405 41d 406 405 405 405 442 489 495 394 405 304 394 394 405 408 406 405 405 334 406 405 419 405 406 405 406 419 418 419 A0 430 A A0 4AM A0 AMD 442 442 442 442 455 455 455 455 An 489 489 442 482 492 A482 82 511 526 82 406 42 406 406 406 482 406 2002 406 482 Ad An 42 Abo a2 4d A0 An 455 A0 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 489 455 An 455 455 a2 489 455 An 455 455 455 489 Ad2 An 489 Ago A n 459 455 4
49. Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 Default value Type Optional 5 3 69 show interface gigabit lt port gt counter Description Display Gigabit Ethernet counter of the Gigabit Ethernet interface or by Gigabit Ethernet port Syntax show interface gigabit lt port gt counter Parameter Name Description port Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 Default value Type Optional 5 3 70 show interface gigabit lt port gt vlan Description Display VLAN information of the Gigabit Ethernet interface or by Gigabit Ethernet port Syntax show interface gigabit lt port gt vlan Parameter Name Description port Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 Default value Type Optional 234 5 3 71 show mac spoofing detect config Description Display MAC Spoofing Detect configuration Syntax show mac spoofing detect config Parameter None 5 3 72 show mac spoofing detect log Description Display MAC Spoofing Detect log Syntax show mac spoofing detect log Parameter None 5 3 73 show management all Description Display all system management port ip setting Syntax show management all Parameter None 5 3 74 show management gbe Description Display GBE management port ip setting Syntax show management gbe Parameter None 5 3 75 show pm lt port gt adsl day Description Display performance monitoring data for previous 1 day or current day Synta
50. Mandatory 229 5 3 54 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line Description Display xDSL line status by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 55 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line config Description Display xDSL line configuration information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line config Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 56 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line delt test Description Display xDSL line DELT test information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line delt test Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 230 5 3 57 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line information Description Syntax Parameter Display xDSL line information by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line information Name Description Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 5 3 58 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl inventory Description Syntax Parameter Di
51. Mandatory 281 5 4 122 time set date Description Set date of the system default is current system date Syntax time set date MM DD YY MM DD CCYY Parameter Name Description MM Month Valid values 01 12 Type Mandatory DD Day of month Valid values 01 31 Type Mandatory CC Century Valid values 0 Type Optional YY Short year start from 2000 Valid values 00 99 Type Mandatory 5 4 123 time set time Description Set time of the system default is current system time Syntax time set time hh mm hh mm ss Parameter Name Description hh Hour in 24 hour format Valid values 00 23 Type Mandatory mm Minute Valid values 00 59 Type Mandatory ss Second Valid values 00 59 Type Optional 282 5 4 124 time set timezone Description Syntax Parameter Set timezone time set timezone lt timezone gt Name Description timezone Timezone Type Mandatory Valid values Given below idl GMT 12 00 International Date Line idlw GMT 12 00 International Date Line West nt GMT 11 00 Nome Time ahst GMT 10 00 Alaska GMT Hawaii Standard Time hst GMT 10 00 Hawaiian Standard Time bat GMT 10 00 BDT cat GMT 10 00 Central Alaska Time yst GMT 09 00 Yukon Standard Time hdt GMT 09 00 HDT pst GMT 08 00 Pacific Standard Time ydt GMT 08 00 YDT mst GMT 07 00 Mountain Standard Time
52. Mandatory VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 35 show igmp rtport Description Display all IGMP router port list or by VLAN ID Syntax show igmp rtport vlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 223 5 3 36 show igmp acl bind gigabit Description Display IGMP ACL bind status for gigabit interface Syntax show igmp acl bind gigabit lt port gt Parameter Name Description port Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 Default value Type Optional 5 3 37 show igmp acl bind xdsl Description Display IGMP ACL bind status for xdsl bridge port Syntax show igmp acl bind xdsl lt port gt Parameter Name Description port Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 38 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds snr Description Display carrier information of far end snr downstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds snr Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 224 5 3 39 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds qin Description Display carrie
53. PPPoA works only for PVC 1 PVC 4 Refer to section 5 11 for IPoA configuration commands 5 7 34 quiet period Description 802 1x Quiet Period in Seconds The period that 802 1x system stay in the quiet state Syntax quiet period lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Timeout for quiet period 298 Valid values 1 65534 Default value 60 Type Mandatory 5 7 35 reauthentication disable Description Disable Reauthentication for this port Syntax reauthentication disable Parameter none 5 7 36 reauthentication enable Description Enable Reauthentication for this port Syntax _reauthentication enable Parameter none 5 7 37 reauth period Description 802 1x Time after which an automatic re authentication should be initiated Syntax reauth period lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Re authentication period Valid values 1 65534 Default value 3600 Type Mandatory 5 7 38 stack Description Enable disable VLAN stacking Syntax stack enable disable Parameter None 5 7 39 stack tls port enable Description Enable VLAN stack TLS transparent LAN service port Syntax stack tls port enable disable Parameter None 299 5 7 40 tcm policer Description Bind Unbind Three Color Marking TCM Policer profile Syntax tcm policer lt number gt bind unbind Parameter Name Description lt numbe
54. Parameter None 5 4 7 alarm history clear Description Clear alarm history Syntax alarm history clear Parameter None 5 4 8 atmdesc Description Go to ATM description execution mode from Configure mode Syntax atmdesc Parameter None 5 4 9 atm loopback Description ATM loopback testing OAM Cell Generation enable OAM Cell Generation disable Set ATM loopback type or clear loopback status fora PVC Syntax atm loopback enable atm loopback disable atm looback lt port gt lt pvc gt type lt type gt clear Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 248 Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt type gt ATM loopback type Valid values f5 e2e f5 segment Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 10 cli config session Description Set CLI max number of connection sessions Syntax Parameter cli config session lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Set CLI max number of connection sessions Valid values 1 10 Default value 5 Type Mandatory 5 4 11 cli config timeout Description Set CLI configuration timeout value Syntax Parameter cli config timeout lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Set CLI connection timeout value Valid values 180 3600 sec Default value 300 sec Type Mandatory
55. Procedure 1 If all subscribers connected to the DSLAM are affected and the SYS LED on the front panel is not lit check the both end of power cords WR f one of the power cords is not connected power up the DSLAM by plugging the power cord to the power socket power outlet m f the power cords are both connected follow Procedure 1 to troubleshoot the DSLAM for power up problem If all subscribers are affected check the SYS LED on the front panel if it is red replace the DSLAM If only some subscribers are affected identify the ports that have problems Check that the subscribers are connected to the line interfaces properly Contact your local distributor Procedure 3 Troubleshoot POTS Service Problems Problem indication No POTS service to the affected subscribers ADSLx service is ok Procedure 1 2 Check the connection of the POTS lines at the POTS connector for the DSLAM Use a bridging connector to couple the POTS and subscriber lines If this solves the problem replace the DSLAM Check the condition of the POTS lines and connectors 373 Procedure 4 Subscriber Service Problems Problem indication No POTS and ADSL service to the affected subscribers Procedure 1 Check the connection of the subscriber lines and POTS lines at the subscriber line connector for DSLAM for subscribers that do not have POTS and ADSLx service m If this step
56. Replaced In this mode the system will change the user port s C Tag to the Uplink port s S Tag And the mapping is one to one that is one user port s C Tag one VID can only translate to one uplink port s S Tag one VID and vice versa For example for ADSL Porti PVC1 if ADSL VID 5 translates to GIGA1 VID 1 then you cannot make ADSL VID 5 translate to another GIGA VID You also cannot make another ADSL VID translate to GIGA VID1 Upstream C Tag gt User port Uplink port gt S Tag Downstream S Tag gt Uplink port User port gt C Tag 3 Stacking In this mode the system will add S TAG before user port s C TAG Note that the mapping from C Tag to S Tag C Tag is still one to one So a user port s C Tag can t be used for another translation rule as well as an uplink port s S Tag C Tag Upstream C Tag gt User port Uplink port gt S Tag C Tag Downstream S Tag C Tag gt Uplink port User port gt C Tag 4 Stacking and Replaced In this mode the system will replace the user port s C Tag to C Tag and add S Tag before C Tag Note that the mapping from C Tag to S Tag C Tag is still one to one So a user port s C Tag can t be used for another translation rule as well as an uplink port s S Tag C Tag Upstream C Tag gt User port Uplink port gt S Tag C Tag Downstream S Tag C Tag gt Uplink port User port gt C Tag Translat
57. booting Authorized operators can query the DB to obtain configuration data 3 2 1 Bridge Configuration The bridge configuration of the IDL 2402 includes the following aspects Interface setup VLAN configuration static VLAN protocol based VLAN VLAN translation and IP MAC anti spoofing Access Control Filtering VLAN priority remark rate limit and priority queue mapping Forwarding database DSL Line Identify IGMP configuration IPoA configuration 48 3 2 2 ADSL Configuration Configuration for an ADSLx user port is provisioned by the parameter set which is a group of attributes that determine the user port behaviors and we call it as a profile The IDL 2402 provides a profile based provisioning per the definition of ITUT G997 1 and RFC 2662 for ADSL line configuration data and a mechanism to associate the ADSL port to these profiles One or more ADSL lines may be configured to share parameters of a single profile The ADSL profiles of IDL 2402 include H Service Profile The parameters include Rate adaptive mode selection Min max planned bit rate Interleaving Max delay and Minimum impulse noise protection H Spectrum Profile The parameters include the Power management setting Min max target noise margin allowed ADSL modes of operation Carrier mask RFI band data Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power Maximum PSD level PSD shape for ADSL2 Power back off initiation and Maximum aggregate receive pow
58. by selecting in the Time Zone drop down list Time Zone Sixty five of the world s time zones are presented including those using standard time and summer daylight savings time System Date Sets system date yyyy mm dd System Time Sets system time hh mm ss Polling Interval Sets the polling interval in seconds that SNTP client will sync with a designated SNTP server SNTP Server address Sets the dedicated unicast server IP address for which the SNTP client can synchronize its time Modify Click on this button to submit the modification 73 4 1 10 IP Routes This option allows you to configure the IP route table for the in band management traffic From the System menu click on P Routes The following page is displayed Click on the drop down list to select the page to be displayed first IP Routes System Du 31 DW ECH Set Next No 5 ADD Next Destination Het Mask Gateway Next gt 0 0 Page 1 of 2 x Delete o o o o o o o o o o a IP Route Setup Label Description System Gateway This field shows current system default gateway You can modify the gateway address by typing in new value and then click on Set If the DSLAM is a Slave in a cluster this field shows the in band IP address of the Master if the DSLAM is a Master in a cluster this field shows the IP address of the Cluster gateway ADD Next Click on
59. e 290 EE 290 5 7 6 auth SevertiMeout dE 291 5 17 ee le 291 RE ee E 291 EE EE ee EE 292 EE BING rirnan maea enaa ne biceds adits aaae aa ana vacated 292 EE ysin a a Eaa 292 ELE 293 5 7 13 force Priority sabes Eed eet ee 293 Sm fea igmp acl Bind EE 293 e715 ION HAC MMAXSOQLOUD EE 293 EE 294 5 17 interimantea l S92 22s cei cues ohetcet chet key eEg 294 Def 1G IPMANOWGG iste ciicsstasu a crac palate t eta nteo eae ts 294 e BEE 294 EIERE 294 5 21 MANA lt E E 295 522 NANA OO EE 295 S29 MaX Ac Oa een eer ae meine metry meen meen arene enemy eer ee 295 5 7 24 port control QUO EE 296 5 7 25 port control force authorized ee 296 5 7 26 port control force unautbortzed ee 296 5 27 RETTEN 296 5 7 28 protocol base ege geg 296 eege 297 5 7 30 pvc DEES eee rgegegegege eg eege egdeeggegeg ege geegegegegeegegdeg 297 5 LSN PVC MAUS SC PIC asso sates ad ie aiaa cartes asain neonate one eae eee 297 5 7 32 pvc EE 298 5 7 33 PVC encapsulation EEN 298 E el PE E 298 5 7 35 reauthentication disable AEN 299 5 7 36 reauthentication enable AEN 299 EE EE 299 5 38 ee eg 299 5 7 99 EE tS DOM TEE 299 5 7 40 TCIM neller EE 300 5 7 41 vlan lt VLAN ID gt disables awa a aan Alas al eh ea aaa ae 300 D742 Maire VAN IDS E 300 5 7 43 vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority EE 301 ENEE E E E E 301 5 8 GBE Bridge Mode Command sccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 302 et EE 302 5 82 default aN EE 302 eet E 302 Eegeregie 302 Deo e
60. gt Owner name Valid values string type value max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 95 rmon statistic lt index gt delete Description Delete RMON statistic entry Syntax rmon statistic lt index gt delete Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON statistic entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 273 5 4 96 rmon statistic lt index gt ifc Description Set Physical interface Syntax rmon statistic lt index gt ifc lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Physical interface index Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 97 rmon statistic lt index gt owner Description Set RMON statistic owner Syntax rmon statistic lt index gt owner lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt Owner name Valid values string type value max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 98 route Description Add routing to route table Syntax route lt ipv4 address gt netmask lt ipv4 address gt gateway lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IP address 274 Valid values x
61. have the same weight value the system will work as Weighted Round Robin WRR mode The system allows 8 priority levels fully work as WFQ or WRR mode via using queues of Q3 O0 only in the Priority Queue Mapping table 126 4 3 4 Forwarding 4 3 4 1 TP Forwarding DB This option allows you to retrieve the status of the transparent forwarding database The forwarding table will reveal the information of MAC addresses that are learned or statically configured on a specific bridge port From the Bridge menu click on Forwarding and then TP Forwarding DB The following page is displayed Forward Table Aging Time 10 1000000 sech D Modify Mo From 1 To 15 No range from 1 to 6144 Query TP Forwarding DB Label Description Type in the aging time in seconds An entry will be removed from the Aging Time FDB aged out if the device does not transmit for a specified period of time the aging time Modify Click on this button to submit the modification of Aging Time Select the range of entry number in the forwarding database to be No From To displayed Once you have selected the entry number click on this button to get Query most recent status of MAC addresses forwarding 127 4 3 4 2 Forwarding Static This option allows you to configure the static MAC address forwarding entries on a specific bridge port The setting of static MAC address takes effect on egress direction of br
62. lt eir gt lbs lt lbs gt disable Parameter Name Description number Share DLB profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt Cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 349 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt First Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory lt eir gt Excess Info Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Second Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory 5 17 3 non share slb Description Set non share SLB Single Leaky Bucket Delete the non share SLB profile Syntax non share slb lt number gt cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt disable Parameter Name Description number Share SLB profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt Cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory 350 5 17 4 non share dlb Description Set non share DLB Dual Leaky Bucket Delete the non share DLB profile Syntax non share dlb lt number gt cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt eir lt eir gt lbs lt lbs gt disable Param
63. on the rate limit mechanism Leaky bucket size The unit is millisecond This parameter ranges from 1 SE to 1024 The bucket depth is the product of CIR and this parameter Modify Click on this button to modify data in the table Query Click on this button to get most recent status Delete To delete a VID entry type in the VID number and then click on this button to delete 120 H Rate Limit Policer profile The IDL 2402 supports two kinds of TCM Policer two rate TCM with dual leaky buckets and single rate TCM with single leaky bucket The single rate TCM meters a traffic stream and marks its packets according to Committed Information Rate CIR and Committed Burst Size CBS to be either green or red The single rate TCM operates with a single leaky bucket that is updated according to only one rate the committed information rate CIR A packet is marked green if the leaky bucket is not full and red otherwise The two rate TCM meters a traffic stream and marks its packets based on two rates Committed Information Rate CIR and Excess Information Rate EIR and their associated burst sizes Committed Burst Size CBS and Excess Burst Size EBS to be either green yellow or red The two rate TCM operates with dual leaky bucket where each bucket is updated according to a different rate The first bucket is updated according to the CIR the second bucket is updated according to the EIR A packet is m
64. private IP address on in band port for both Master and Slave IPDSLAM The private IP is used for communication between Master and Slave The management center actually uses Cluster IP address for remote management Master and Slave need to be configured with same management VLAN The default gateway should be configured to the router that is aware how to route management traffic to Management Center of the management network The setting of Cluster default gateway should be the same between Master and Slave 57 4 WEB Management Web Configuration Tool Overview To access Web Configuration Tool on an IDL 2402 1 Connect a PC to the console port of the DSLAM At the console type the following CLI command WDS gt enable enter the enable command mode from initial mode WDS show management all display all in band management IP setting The default LAN IP address is got via DHCP 2 At your web browser enter the URL you retrieve by using the above command If you need to change the accessing port number default is 80 of the Web Configuration Tool use the following CLI command with the correct values added WDS configure enter the configuration command mode from enable mode WDS conf http port lt number gt set http port number 3 Logging in to Web Configuration Tool Once you connect to the DSLAM a login page is displayed You must enter your username and password to access the pages The default login usern
65. system will count from zero again The sample in T2 is the first one crossing the Rising Threshold so an alarm occurs No alarms will be generated afterwards unless the counting value overflows and count from zero again the sample in T10 causes an alarm again Absolute Value Over Flow 22 1 Count from Zero again Alarm Falling Threshold nampa n nmin nnn ee meee feet tenet eu ps oe T10 Time 200 Another figure shows the example of RMON alarm for DELTA sample type As shown in the following figure the delta value varies high and low The sample in T1 is the first one crossing the Rising Threshold so an alarm occurs No alarms will be generated afterwards until T5 sample which is crossing the Falling Threshold note that the value of the previous sample T4 sample is greater than the Falling Threshold and the value of T5 sample Alarm is not generated for T7 sample since an alarm is already generated for T5 sample and the curve is not in a downward trend around T7 A Rising Threshold crossing alarm is generated again for T10 sample because a Falling Threshold crossing alarm T5 has occurred after the previous Rising Threshold crossing alarm T1 Delta Value Rising Threshold Falling Threshold ER FE T4 Ts ET T10 Time No Alarm 201 Event This option allows you to configure the RMON event setting Click on New to create an entry To modify an entry click on the index to select the ent
66. the IP address of the FTP server Server User Name Type in the ftp user name Server Password Type in the ftp password File Name Type in the firmware filename Firmware Update Status This field shows current status of firmware update process Firmware Partition Select Select firmware memory partition Partition 1 or 2 If you change to the other partition not current partition the system will restart immediately 43 This section displays the partition information including firmware version updating date and status active or not Note that active partition means the partition for next power up not current partition in use You can refer to Current Version to know which partition is the current partition in use When you update the firmware new firmware will be written to the partition that is not currently in use Partition Information FTP Get in progress The following message is displayed during getting file from FTP server incoming cluster id O FTP SERVER IP 172 16 10 219 Waiting for FTP Session about 30 sec Firmware Write in progress The Flash Write process may take a few minutes you must not turn off or reset the system during the process 1 varning Upgrading firmware may take a few minutes please don t turn off or reset the system 2 Once the system has upgraded already please restart it Firmware Write successfully When the
67. the entry type in new value and then click on Modify To delete an entry click on the index to select the entry and then click on Delete Select Type Remote Monitoring History Control History Control D Data Source G3E1 v Requestedi1 65535 50 Interval i 3600 1300 new ec I Pan ze RMON History Control Table Label Description Data Source Data source identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed in a table on behalf of this HistoryControl entry Here the source is GBE1 interface Owner An owner is the entity that configured this entry and is therefore using the resources assigned to it Requested Requested value is the requested number of intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of the media specific table associated with this HistoryControl entry Granted The number of sampling intervals over which data shall be saved in the part of the media specific table associated with thisHistoryControl entry Interval The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the media specific table associated with this HistoryControl entry The value range is 1 to 3600 sec 196 ETH History This option is for displaying Ethernet interface RMON history data Before a history table is available you have to create a History Control entry in advance see previous section To que
68. the row number ID This field shows the alarm ID Description This field shows the description for the alarm This field shows the alarm level Valid values are Level MJ major alarm MN minor alarm State This field shows the alarm state Set or Clear Sequential Sequential number Time Alarm occurring date and time 184 History Alarm History Alarm AlarmEvent Select History Alarm D Query Clear History History Alarm Table Label Description Query Click on this button to query history alarms Clear History Click on this button to clear the alarm history table Row This field shows the row number ID This field shows the alarm ID Description This field shows the description for the alarm This field shows the alarm level Valid values are Level MJ major alarm MN minor alarm State This field shows the alarm state Set or Clear Sequential Sequential number Time Alarm occurring date and time 185 Event Log Type in the range of rows and then click on the Query button AlarmEvent Select Event Log D Query Clear Event Event Log Event Log Label Description Query Click on this button to query most recent event log Clear Event Click on this button to clear the event log Row This field shows the row number ID This field shows the event ID Description This field shows the description for the event Sequent
69. this button to add a new IP route Destination Type in the destination IP address for the new IP route Net Mask Type in the subnet mask for the new IP route Gateway Type in the IP address of the gateway for the new IP route Delete Select Click on the radio button to select a route and then click on Delete to remove this route from the table 74 4 1 11 User Administration This option allows you to administer accounts for users who access the DSLAM From the System menu click on User Administration Click on Select drop down list and select a page to display The following page is displayed User Administration Page 1 of 4 No 1to8 ei User Administration Click on the drop down list and select the page to be displayed Click on this button to create a new user You will enter the following page User Administration username Once you have typed in all the information for the new user click on the Create button Click on the radio button on the leftmost column of the user table to select the user you want to delete modify Then click on Delete Modify button Note that the default admin user cannot be deleted 75 User Name Shows the name of the user up to 32 characters The available access levels include Level SUPERUSER ENGINEER and GUEST Aging day Set password expiration days 0 for no expiration days Start Date Shows the day when the
70. want to bind This is for quick value assignment Quickly Binding Assign Click on this drop down list to select the binding action This is for quick value assignment Options are off unbind the profile on bind the profile reset rebind the profile Click on this button to apply the parameter values you have just Assign entered or selected But these values haven t been really saved in the database You must click on Modify to save the values Modify Click on this button to submit the modification Port Click on the checkbox to select the port you want to modify or assign values You can type in the maximum IGMP groups can be joined Max Groups simultaneously to limit the concurrent multicast channels for a p bridge port This value is effective only when the limit maximum IGMP groups function is enabled refer to section 4 3 6 Profile ID You can select the profile ID you want to bind here Binding Status You can select the binding action here 135 4 3 6 3 IGMP Multicast This option allows you to query the IGMP multicast status From the Bridge menu click on IGMP and then IGMP Multicast The IGMP Group page is displayed Click on the IGMP Type drop down list and select Group or Source IGMP Type gt Group Click on List by drop down list to select listing by entry number or listing by VID amp IGMP group IP List by Number IGMP Group ay wnt varon t o s
71. when remarking a packet s output color as red Valid value is 0 7 for VLAN Priority color field or 0 63 for DSCP color field 125 4 3 3 4 Priority Queue Mapping This web page is used to select SPQ WFQ WRR queuing mechanism and to setup the mapping between VLAN priority levels and system internal queues From the Bridge menu click on Access Control and then Priority Queue Mapping The following page is displayed Priority Queue Mapping Modify Query eighted range from 1 255 eo miso S 40 WW o WW o WW o Queue el Queue6 Queue 5 Queue 4 Y Queue 3 Queue 2 Queuex0 eiiOueue e The queues for Giga and ATM interfaces are different Giga The Giga interface has 4 Queues and these queues can only work on Strict Priority Queuing SPQ scheduling The priorities of these queues are Q3 gt Q2 gt Q1 gt Q0 ATM Each ATM PVC bridge interface on each ADSL port has 8 Queues and can work in SPQ or SPQ WFQ mix mode For SPQ the priorities of these queues are Q7 gt Q6 gt Q5 gt Q4 gt Q3 gt Q2 gt Q1 gt Q0 For SPQ WFQ mixed the priority of SPQ queues Q7 Q4 is higher than WFQ queues Q3 Q0 And Q7 Q4 are for SPQ and the priorities are Q7 gt Q6 gt Q5 gt Q4 Q3 QO are for WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing and you can define the weight value for Q3 Q0 Note that if each queue has different weight value the system will work as WFQ mode If all queues
72. you follow a troubleshooting procedure start from the first step of the procedure If the first step does not solve the problem proceed to the next step keep going through the steps until the problem is solved Use the following table to find out the appropriate procedure for troubleshooting the listed problems 371 List of Troubleshooting Procedures Type of problem Procedure Number IDL 2402 power up problems Procedure 1 ADSLx service problems POTS service is ok Procedure 2 POTS service problems ADSLx service is ok Procedure 3 Subscriber service problems no POTS and ADSLx service Procedure 4 Procedure 1 Troubleshooting for Power Up Problems Problem indication H The SYS LED on the front panel is not lit even though the DSLAM is powered up H Alarm that indicates a system power up problem E Subscribers connected to the DSLAM do not have DSL service POTS service is ok Procedure 1 Check that the power cord is connected to the power socket on the front panel and the other end of the cord is connected to a power outlet 2 Check that the power feeds are connected to the DSLAM and that power is present on the two power feeds with correct polarity 3 Replace the IDL 2402 4 Contact your local distributor 372 Procedure 2 Troubleshoot ADSLx Service Problems Problem indication No ADSLx service to the affected subscribers POTS service is ok
73. zc eee The First Index is default profile cant modify amp delete OP Mode 1 Carrier Mask 1 RFI 1 Pwr Management Message LO Time L2 ATPR Direction de min L2 Time L2 ATPRT us min EE RE E EE Noise Margin Power 0 31 0 51 1 db Disable L2 L2L3 Oo S e EE ADSL Spectrum Profile setup Label Description Click on the drop down list and select the range of profile index Select Index Options are 1 4 5 8 117 120 This field shows the profile index Click on the radio button beside the profile index Index to select the profile you want to modify or delete Note that profile 1 default cannot be modified or deleted Name Type in the name of the profile Click on the radio button to select allowed power management mode Options are Power Mode Disable only LO state allowed L2 LO and L2 states allowed L2L3 LO L2 and L3 states allowed Type in the minimum time in seconds between Exit from L2 low power state and SE the next Entry into the L2 low power state Value range is 0 255 Type in the minimum time in seconds between an Entry into L2 low power state L2 Time and the first L2 low power trim request and between two consecutive L2 power trim requests Value range is 0 255 L2 ATPR Type in the maximum aggregate transmit power reduction in dB that is allowed at 145 transition of LO to L2 state
74. 0 0 0 0 means an operator is needless IGMP Router s IP Create Dette IGMP Router Port Setup Label Description Modify Click on this button to modify the IGMP configuration once you have set new values for the parameters IGMP Version Select the IGMP version Options are IGMP OFF IGMP V1 IGMP V2 and IGMP V3 IGMP Mode Select the IGMP mode Options are Snooping and Proxy IGMP ACL Mode Disable or enable ACL mode IGMP ACL profile refer to section 4 3 6 will be effective only when ACL mode is enabled Enabled the system will deny IGMP packets that have no router alert option Deny No Alert in their IP header Disabled default value the system will not care router alert option Enabled the system will limit the maximum active counter of IGMP groups can be joined concurrently for every bridge port Max Groups Limit Disabled the system will not limit the counter of IGMP groups can be joined for the bridge port 131 Query 1 500 s The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier By varying this value an administrator may tune the number of IGMP messages on the network larger values cause IGMP Queries to be sent less often Value range is 1 500 Default is 125 seconds The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s URI 1 500 s initial report of membership in a group Value range is 1 500
75. 1 EN 61000 4 4 2004 EN 61000 4 5 1995 A1 2001 EN 61000 4 6 1996 A1 2001 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer O Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 11F No 96 Min Chuan Road Hsin Tien Taipei Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Allen Huang Position Title Product Manager Taiwan 30th Oct 2008 Place Date Legal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw _http www planet com tw 11F No 96 Min Chuan Road Hsin Tien Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528
76. 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt dscp gt Diffserv Code Points which is a 6 bit number The standardized combinations are listed below default Default value bits 000000 af11 Assured Forwarding Class 1 Low Drop bits 001010 334 5 14 2 ds list Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 3 dstip Description Syntax af12 Assured Forwarding Class 1 Medium Drop bits 001100 af13 Assured Forwarding Class 1 High Drop bits 001110 af21 Assured Forwarding Class 2 Low Drop bits 0 10010 af22 Assured Forwarding Class 2 Medium Drop bits 010100 af23 Assured Forwarding Class 2 High Drop bits 010110 af31 Assured Forwarding Class 3 Low Drop bits 011010 af32 Assured Forwarding Class 3 Medium Drop bits 011100 af33 Assured Forwarding Class 3 High Drop bits 011110 af41 Assured Forwarding Class 4 Low Drop bits 100010 af42 Assured Forwarding Class 4 Medium Drop bits 100100 af43 Assured Forwarding Class 4 High Drop bits 1 00110 ef Expedited Forwarding bits 101110 Show Differentiated Service priority list ds list None Specify dest IP address of packets to remark vian priority Show dest IP address priority list entry Disable dest IP address priority list entry dstip lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt ip lt ip
77. 255 0 Then you can set computer s IP to 192 168 1 x 255 255 255 0 The range for x is from 2 to 253 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 1 10 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server x JC cca 2 3 2 WEB Configuration Procedure Step 1 Using your WEB Browser Open web browser and type http 192 168 1 1 in the browser s address box This IP is the default IP address of IDL 2402 Press Enter Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help E gt x 2 Lei JO search Sp Favorites GC d s 4 Ki Address http 192 168 1 1 M gt E 27 Step 2 Login the IDL 2402 A login page will appear Please type your username password and click Sign in The default username password is admin admin Web Interface Login Username admin Password eeees a Level 1 SuperUser R W Management all a Level 2 Engineer RAW Disabled from User Account Level 3 Guest Read only After you login the IDL 2402 you will see the system information as below System Information CCESS LOGIN
78. 295 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 79 rmon alarm lt index gt owner Description RMON alarm owner Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt owner lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt Owner name Valid values max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 80 rmon alarm lt index gt rising_eventindex Description Set RMON alarm rising event index Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt rising_eventindex lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt RMON alarm rising event index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 81 rmon alarm lt index gt rising_threshold Description Set RMON alarm rising threshold Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt rising_threshold lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 267 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt RMON alarm rising threshold Valid values 0 4294967295 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 82 rmon alarm lt index gt sample_type Description RMON alarm sample type Compared directly with the thresholds or Difference compared with the thresholds Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt sample_type absolute delta Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMO
79. 327 5 13 5 unshp Description Syntax Parameter 5 13 6 vbr1 Description Syntax Parameter Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory unshaped traffic setting atmNoTrafficDescriptor unshp lt index gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory VBR type 1 traffic setting atmNoClpScrCdvt vr lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt scr lt scr gt mbs lt mbs gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt SCIr gt Sustained Cell Rate 328 5 13 7 vbr2 Description Syntax Parameter Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt mbs gt Maximum Burst Size Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory VBR type 2 traffic setting atmClpNo TaggingScrCadvt vbr2 lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt scr lt scr gt mbs lt mbs gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell
80. 32763 32763 32769 32763 32763 32768 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32763 32769 32763 32763 32763 Sa ee e e e a ee ae a ae a LECE 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 327639 32763 32763 32769 32763 32769 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 am ee e re re re re 57 7 7 7 EEEE E EEE 376 EEEL 3 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32763 32763 32769 32763 32769 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32763 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32769 32769 32763 The TSS formula tss value 1 32768 The Transmit Spectrum Shaping for the Upstream direction as exchanged at init Far END Net 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32769 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32763 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32763 32763 32763 32769 32763 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 155 Carrier Type TSS MEIS LN HUNC Hoi The SHR formula snr 32 value 2 dB The Signal to Noise Ratio per carrier over the Upstream passband Near END Carnet Ekel ett Al An de tel Gr let Ee ten et ckt aL 0 31 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 122 132 143 149 159 162 164 166 169 171 174 175 175 174 175 175 175 174 171 155 164 100 153 142 133 32 63 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 2
81. 334 Ee Eelere 335 ET EE 335 Lal Eee Ee BT 336 EE EE he 337 i FOOSE LNG EE 338 EN ER TE 338 5 14 8 ethertype list seis sesechcdewbensedenjentedoctennedaxpentydaebesdedeebeesedeciecdedenpentedexbnasse 339 NEE 3110 61010 EE 339 5 14 10 ipprotocol UE 340 E RIE EE 340 EE 341 BT ANS SECM AG v E E E E E huonbabibubedubeenees 342 5 14 14 Srema TEE EE 342 EE ee lnc ea sete a ai ese ed oie i he lle si bcos od esi led etd 343 Oe Fs WO 10S E 344 Lo Pad Fr TA 1 8 Heme mee EO ae REE Oa PRE aE ROMER aE SERED AE POSER EEA aE EEE EO EEA O REA IDE E E 344 EE ak E Le KIC EE 345 5 15 Alarm Profile Mode COMMA cc0sscscssseeensseeenseeeeseeeesseeenseesenseesenaees 346 BA ALITY EE 346 EE dE nn 346 5 Te EERSTEN ee 346 EE Een un TEE 347 5 16 IGMP ACL Profile Mode Commands ccccessseeeeecessseeeeennseeeeeeenseeeees 348 5 16 1 igmp EE 348 5 16 2 igmp acl rebind WEE 348 5 17 Rate Limit Profile Mode COMMANGG cccceeseeeeeeeessseeeeeensseeeseeenseeeees 349 SEL Ste ee Eege 349 S17 2shared D EE EE EE 349 5 17 3 non share Slb ee 350 S AA NO Shae d e EE 351 5 18 Service Profile Configure Mode Commands ecceccesseeeeseeeeeeeteees 352 EE EE 352 ENEE EE 352 5 18 3 l2 packet eat aes etcetera atte eae aoa beeen teeta rae 352 Loe Fo re 353 ae 353 18 NOISEIMANQIIN RE 353 Ae Lo A LEE 354 5 18 8 service nn issinccaesaaiidanceueriateonseidtncrenentibribeochenabebebehessbabanabienunabetes 354 5 19 Spectrum Pro
82. 47 Click on this button to view modify Radio Frequency Interference RFI Bands data Input the Start Stop frequency select the Ingress Level Egress Control Signal Type and then click on the Apply button Modify Status Complete modems will re train after you click on Apply button ADSL Spectrum Profile 1 RFI Modify Status Complete pn o None fNoContrat Neither z pn o None x fNoContrat Neither z O o None x NoContrat x Neither z nu O None Z NoControt Neither nu O None NoContrat Neither nu pn yen NoControt Neither pn o None J NoControt Neither nu 8 None NoContrat Neither ADSL Spectrum Carrier Mask ADSL Spectrum OP Mode IP DSLAM Terms and conditions Copyright 2007 148 4 4 1 4 Spectrum ADSL x Profile This option allows you to configure the ADSL2 2 READSL spectrum profile From the ADSL menu click on Profile and then Spectrum Profile ADSLx The following page is displayed ADSL Spectrum Profile ADSL2 Select Index 014 DI Modify Query The First Index is default profile cant modify amp delete To modify Spectrum Adsl2 ReAdsl or Adsl2plus profile please create spectrum main profile first 2 Modem Aggregate PSD Max Rx Aggr Features seid ain Power Level Allowed PWR ZS fee eS EES KE e e ec KEE e e ec ADSL2 ReADSL ADSL2 Spectrum Profile
83. 5 5 21 6 server lt number gt secret eeEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEN 365 5 21 7 server lt index gt vlan number EE 366 5 21 8 server lt number gt Cel elects ete ee 366 ERR ee UE EE 366 5 21 10 profile lt index gt username lt string gt password sssssssserrreessssessene 367 Appendix A ADSL Operational Mask Table seccsseseeeeeesseseeeeeeseeneeeenseenenees 368 Appendix B Alarm TaD sijctsicsisisicastsutinsiadesacesiiuabsusilvatsacisvabtacdduairestiwwbsuseduatsnshiwabsueis 369 Appendix C Cleaning the AIR Filter eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 370 Appendix D Introduction for TroubleShOoting sccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 371 1 Introduction Planet IDL 2402 is a 24 port ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 mini IP DSLAM which has one 1000Base T uplink Interface for efficient scalability and easy deployment in the network with small ADSL environment With built in POTS splitter subscriber ports the PLANET IDL 2402 is a Cost Effective Solution for Network Service Provider to offer excellent services to multiple subscribers The PLANET IDL 2402 supports local and remote managed capabilities of CLI SNMP Telnet via RS 232 Console Port and Web GUI management interface Via the user friendly Web GUI the PLANET IDL 2402 can be managed by workstations running standard web browsers that provide the easy to use operation and convenient maintenan
84. 55 255 255 255 The SHR formula snr 32 value 2 dB The Signal to Noise Ratio per carrier over the Downstream passband Far END camer Otc EE 0 31 64 G4 G4 G4 G4 G4 G4 GA GA G4 GA e G4 GA GA GAGA e e GAGA GA GAGA GA GAGA Sa e GAGA 32 63 GA 142 144 149 151 153 157 160 162 163 166 169 170 172 173 174 176 177 178 179 179 180 180 181 182 181 1 1D 1D i i 93 GA 95 131 172 104 104 IR 104 IR D 141 D L R R D D D D D D 1 i 1 175 i i I im im iw i mM 5 127 187 182 182 182 131 182 181 181 181 181 181 191 191 191 131 181 182 181 181 190 131 190 i 18 182 18 190 0 mm 1M 14 148 13 159 179 179 179 179 179 179 177 176 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 mama 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 La 179 Im am aam mmm mmm mm mm mm mm pe eem 175 Ge me 176 De me De 192 223 175 176 176 176 175 176 175 175 175 175 175 175 174 173 17 175 174 174 174 174 In 17A 17A 17A 17A 175 17A 17A 17A 17A 173 17 224 255 17A 17A 17A In 17A 175 17A APA 174 174 175 174 173 173 172 174 173 172 174 173 17A 17A 17A In 17A 174 In In In Ia 170 255 297 171 171 17A 174 174173 173 173 173 172 172 172 171 172 172 172 171 172 171 169 170 170 149 171 171 170 170 17 172 170 170 171 mam 170 171 170 171 170 171 170 172 172 172 172 172 471 172 171 173 171 172 171 172 172 172 171 171 172 171 172 171 171 172 189 171 320 351 mm 170 17 169 169 169 169 169 169 167 167 167 165 169 165 165 165 165 164 164 164 163 162 162 163 161 161 1
85. 61 161 162 e 352 335 152 152 161 161 161 163 161 161 161 164 165 163 162 165 165 163 164 164 163 165 164 164 166 165 167 165 165 165 165 164 167 165 SAAS 157 164 165 163 163 164 164 162 164 161 161 162 161 162 161 161 199 165 164 163 161 161 163 162 161 160 160 161 155 155 157 153 atgas 152 159 157 160 160 159 160 160 160 159 161 161 160 162 156 157 159 159 161 157 159 159 159 159 159 160 160 161 159 162 160 ei 8 479 150 159 161 162 159 161 161 180 180 159 160 159 159 159 155 159 157 156 161 160 161 160 1539 160 153 155 151 155 157 157 152 155 430 511 157 154 152 154 150 151 149 150 151 153 150 151 149 151 19 149 149 149 A 49 143 49 i4 150 147 139 145 09 D5 23 A carrier Type T55 SRC ONS HUNC HLOG C The QLH formula qin 23 value 2 dBm Hz The Quiet Line Noise measurement per carrier over the Upstream passband Mear END cate OF f 2 3 4 5 6 Ff 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 7 18 19 20 21 2 5 25 2 27 5230 Jl 0 31 255 195 190 191 190 190 194 179 170 155 175 173 173 172 174 190 176 190 174 191 179 179 185 182 182 183 182 191 184 15 189 191 32 63 194 193 192 191 190 190 199 191 190 191 199 190 191 190 192 193 190 199 189 191 190 190 190 190 195 190 191 192 194 191 191 191 The QLH formula qin 23 value 2 dBmHz The Quiet Line Hoise measurement per carrier over the Downstream passband Far END Care 0 1 2 3 4 576 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 192021 22 23 244 25 26 27 2 2930 3l os31 145 230 230 228 220 224 225
86. 7 alm_below_temper System Below Temperature 118 alm_dsl_dsp System DSP Fail 601 alm_adsl_los Near end Loss of Signal 602 alm_adsl_lof Near end Loss of Frame 603 alm_adsl_lom Near end Loss of Margin 610 alm_adsl_lIcd Near end Loss Cell Delineation 612 alm adel ncd Near end No Cell Delineation 613 alm_adsl_los fe Far end Loss of Signal 614 alm_adsl_lof fe Far end Loss of Frame 615 alm_adsl_lom_fe Far end Loss of Margin 616 alm_adsl_lopwr_fe Far end Loss of Power 619 alm_adsl_commf_fe Far end Communication Failure 620 alm_adsl_nopeer_fe Far end No Peer Present 622 alm adel cd fe Far end Loss Cell Delineation 624 alm_adsl_ncd_fe Far end No Cell Delineation Appendix C Cleaning the AIR Filter For better condition of cool system please remember to clean the Air Filter every three months This section provides the procedure for how to clean the Air Filter Procedure Note Before cleaning the Air Filter please power off the IDL 2402 first You must loosen the connection of the Air Filter Panel to the DSLAM and pull out the Air Filter before cleaning the air filter JC Q kl k a Leen DER Du 7 Ei G oom J 888888888888 2 f A L N a os 1 7 f Yo 101 2407 H WH 24 Port DSLAM Switch 4 Air Filter Panel 1 Puton the antistatic wrist strap and connect it to a grounding point 2 Turn the screw on the Air Filter Panel counterclockwise until it loosens the conn
87. 89 455 489 489 442 Ad2 482 482 482 406 4906 482 406 496 406 406 496 511 496 511 406 406 496 406 511 511 405 496 526 526 496 526 526 372 511 526 525 511 511 526 526 526 526 S41 372 541 541 526 541 3G 541 541 557 525 SG 526 541 526 511 526 511 526 526 372 394 442 482 496 42 482 482 42 405 406 405 496 406 526 495 405 405 405 482 482 AD AD 48D dD ABO A0 A n a2 Ago A0 a2 283 319 455 10 102 102 102 102 eee ee ee 106 105 105 106 EE 406 496 511 496 496 511 406 496 4965 511 511 511 511 526 511 495 511 511 526 511 526 511 511 511 511 511 511 525 526 526 526 526 526 526 541 526 526 MG 526 526 526 526 S41 526 3G Sai S41 541 394 SAIL Ai 557 SG 557 S557 SAIL 4065 557 405 557 573 06 557 405 573 405 573 573 418 573 405 590 406 590 414 573 418 590 405 590 419 590 419 609 430 608 430 590 A0 A 590 A0 Gg AD 608 450 430 609 A0 6039 A0 A0 G09 442 G25 442 442 625 442 442 G25 455 442 455 G25 455 455 G44 455 455 455 49 G44 An An A 482 442 691 495 406 4906 511 495 405 406 526 511 541 526 S41 35 541 557 406 557 590 419 590 430 430 425 442 455 455 G42 42 a2 406 511 525 541 394 590 418 609 455 489 Ad 511 541 557 573 442 489 S41 418 625 496 557 41a 496 541 450 496 489 500 422 4 0 The GAIN formula gain value 1 512 The gain allocation over the Upstream passband Far END 9 0 0 Q G0 Q OQ 556 444 494 467 465 524 505 556 540 456 431 524 479 453 459 Ae Agi 529 453 527 447 449 515 556 592 0j0oj0j0ojojojojaojojojojaojojojaojojojaojojojaojaoajojojaojojojaoajajojoj o
88. ATM VCs Supports static source MAC table provisioning automatic source MAC learning and block duplicate ones Supports 4K static MAC address table 128 MAC address per x DSL port VLAN Function IEEE 802 1q Port based Protocol based VLAN 512 non stacked VLAN ID simultaneously ranging from 1 to 4095 VLAN stacking and VLAN cross connect IP Spoofing prevention MAC anti Spoofing Port isolation functionality Static VLAN group and membership provisioning IP multicast forwarding 20 Complies with RFC2684 bridged payload encapsulation mode Up to 256 multicast groups and 512 copies simultaneously Up to 48 profile based Multicast Access Control Limit maximum number of IGMP groups joined per bridge port IGMP snooping proxy per IGMP v1 v2 and v3 IGMP proxy and IGMP snooping Selection Supports Layer 2 frame filtering based on MAC and Ether Type Supports Layer 3 filtering based on IP Protocol and Port number IEEE 802 1X authentication Control the bandwidth occupied by broadcast multicast and unknown unicast flooding Rate limit profile binding per bridge port Three Color Marking TCM policer Ethernet rate limit per bridge port ToS type of service DiffServ differentiated services stripping and priority queuing DSCP mapping to 802 1p Selectable adopted priority queue mechanisms according to Strict Priority Queue SPQ and Weighted Fair Queue
89. Access Level System Date FW Boot Active DB Current DB Super user 2008 09 09 Pastition l _Partition 1 Partition 1 SYSTEM VERSION Hardware Firmware Software Web Circuit 1 24 c 1 00805 1 00505 Mx 06 17b AnnexA IGA STATUS Gigal SYSLED ALMLED Bridge MAC Gigal MAC Config Enabled o 00 30 4F 71 99 0A 00 30 4F 71 99 09 28 Step 3 Configure the DSL PVC Go to Bridge gt Interface Setup gt ADSL PVC setting screen select the ADSL port and click Create to apply the PVC settings For example create PVC 1 to Port 1 The default VPI VCI is 0 35 ver 0 wot 35 _ Traffic Rx Defautt UnShaped Tx Defautt UnShaped Encap LLC Protocol Base VLAN Disabled v Dos Cluster Main Unit v H Refresh System Port 01 12 v Pvc 1 Select Port vp vo Rx Traffic Tx Traffic ENCAP Ribena Interface Setup 1 ADSL PVC ADSL Bridge O 3 ADSL Port Security O 4 VLAN Configuration Access Control 2 Forwarding 6 Relay O 7 IGMP IPoA Q 8 ADSL C 3 Traffic SNMP Maintenance O 11 12 ATM TRAFFIC PARAMETER VPI D wen 35 Traffic Rx Defaut UnShaped Tx Default UnShaped Encap LLC Y Protocol Base VLAN Disabled aL Creste Mocity J Portoin12 el pvc ei Protocol Select Port VPI VC Rx Traffic Tx Traffic ENCAP Base VLAN Default Default Disabled 10 11 12 29 Step 4 Enable the ADSL Port Service Go to System gt ADSL Port S
90. Assured Forwarding Class 4 Medium Drop bits 100100 af43 Assured Forwarding Class 4 High Drop bits 100110 ef Expedited Forwarding bits 101110 Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 4164 Protocol VLAN Protocol Priority Remark PRI Remartd 9 Protocol Remark D No From 1 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete eca z cica Next No 2 Incoming Protocol UI ID e Priority Out 0 Create GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN J VLAN Priority Remark Setup Protocol Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 Query To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to retrieve Delete To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete orca Di oa DN Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Incoming Protocol Click on the drop down list and select the incoming protocol Available options are ICMP IGMP IP in IP TCP GRP IGP UDP GRE IGRP or OSPF Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7
91. Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us qin Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 47 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us hlin Description Display carrier information of near end hlin upstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us hlin Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 227 5 3 48 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us hlog Description Display carrier information of near end hlog upstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us blog Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 49 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds load Description Display carrier information of near end load downstream by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds load Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid value
92. C Query Click on this button to get the most recent data The IDL 2402 supports auto detection of the ATM AAL5 encapsulation method LLC or VC Mux Meanwhile the IDL 2402 is also able to automatically sense the following protocol encapsulations PPPoE over ATM per RFC 2684 IPoE over ATM bridge mode and PPP over ATM IPoA works on individual PVC However there are limitations on auto detection of encapsulations 1 LLC VC Mux automatically detection is only applicable to PVC 1 PVC 4 of each ADSL port PVC 5 PVC 8 must be assigned the ATM AAL5 encapsulation method manually 2 PPPoA works only for PVC 1 PVC 4 and the LLC VC Mux automatically detection must be enabled Refer to section 4 3 7 for IPoA configuration 87 4 3 1 3 ADSL Bridge This option allows you to setup the ADSL bridge interface From the Bridge menu click on Interface Setup and then ADSL Bridge The following page is displayed ADSL Bridge vol 1 VLAN UnTagged v Pri o sn Stack DN ingress ON DN AccFrm 2 4LL Frame sl Isolation ON Priority Force Disabled D ALL TI Modify Port 01 12 pvc 1 DN Query 12 Select Port VI VLAN Ingress Acc Frm Isolation steady Ze 1 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale 2 1 UnTagged pri O No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale E a 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale 4 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale 5 1 UnTagged pr
93. D Management Modify RESTART Inband Address 168 100 Remote IP Board IP Setup o l y fowo System Hame u13726b System Inventory Modify the configuration may cause the connection loss Board IP Setup Table Label Description In Band IP Address Type in the IP address of the DSLAM for in band management lues Subnet Mask Type in the in band subnet mask of the DSLAM No Limit VID Select this checkbox if no specific in band management VLAN is required and the setting in Limit VID parameter will be ignored Inband VID Ge Se Management Limit VID The VLAN ID for individual in band management VLAN Priori Select the VLAN priority level 0 7 of the in band management traffic riority sent out from GBE port Shows current HTTP port setting for Web access You can modify http HTTP Port port setting in this field Shows the IP address of the management PC currently connected to Remote IP this DLSAM System Name You can modify the name of the system here Modify Click on this button to submit the modification RESTART Click on this button to restart the system 63 4 1 3 Ethernet Port Service This option allows you to set the administration state and select the speed mode for the Gigabit Ethernet ports From the System menu click on Ethernet Port Service The following page is displayed Ethernet Por
94. DSL Service Channel Profile setup Label Description Click on the drop down list and select the range of profile index Options Salz are 1 5 6 10 116 120 This field shows the profile index Click on the radio button beside the To profile index to select the profile you want to modify Note that profile 1 default cannot be modified L2 Packet This is a threshold value that is the minimum packet size before the system leaving the L2 low power state Valid value is 0 32 Direction DS downstream US upstream Min Minimum bit rate during show time Planned Planned bit rate during setup BitRate Max Maximum bit rate during show time L2 Min Minimum bit rate during L2 low power state DownShift Noise Margin dB Decrease net data rate if Noise Margin is below the Downshift Noise 143 Min Interval sec Margin for DownShift Min Interval UpShift Noise Margin dB Min Increase net data rate if Noise Margin is above the Upshift Noise Margin Interval sec for Upshift Min Interval Interleaving MaxDelay Maximum interleaving delay 1 63 ms IMP 0 8 symbols Minimum impulse noise protection 0 0 8 0 dB 144 4 4 1 3 Spectrum Main Profile This option allows you to configure the ADSL spectrum profile From the ADSL menu click on Profile and then Spectrum Profile main The following page is displayed ADSL Spectrum Profile Select index Jo x Query
95. Default value Type Mandatory 284 5 4 127 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one Description Set one to one VLAN translation Syntax 1 C tag reserved vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one reserved priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt 2 C tag replaced vian trans vian translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one replaced lt uplink VLAN ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt 3 Stacking and C tag reserved vian trans vian translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one stacking lt uplink VLAN ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt 4 Stacking and C tag replaced vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one stacking lt uplink VLAN ID gt ctag replaced lt c tag VLAN ID gt lt c tag PRIO ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt user port VLAN ID gt ADSL port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt upl
96. Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter rules in the table aost z Pot 1 pvc4 sl SC drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA Source IP Type in the IP Address of the source MASK Type in the subnet mask Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 102 Layer 4 Destination Port Filtering Layer 4 Destination Port Filtering Filtering Typel L4 Dest Port DN No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL x Port 1 sllpwc3 D NextNo 2 Destination Port 65535 Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Layer 4 Destination Port Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here No From To Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number value 1 256 Que Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to ry display the filter rules Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to Delete delete the filter rules in the table aost gt Pot 1 pvc 4 sl Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Destination Port Type in the Destination Port number 1 65535 Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 103 Destination IP Filtering Destination IP
97. E 218 5 3 9 show access list l4dstport AA 218 5 3 10 show access list MCfldrate ee 218 5 3 11 show access list SICID EE 218 5 3 12 show access list e 219 DSAI SHOW ACCOMM EE 219 5 3 14 le Ee e BEE 219 5 3 15 show alarm current ee aa ata sal eth fatal fae ia oe 219 Ded PO SIMOW ANT OV CIN RE 219 523 17 SNOW GAIT histo EEN 219 5 3 18 show AIMG CS Cies5 oct teeheceteeiestetoctectedanbenhdankurebenhvatsbaebestadenbentedanbaates 220 5 3 19 show atm Joopback ask 220 5 3 20 show cli config WEEN 220 S 12 SNOW TEE 220 D9 22 SNOW COU yeas ERS OLE EERE A RIA ihe na AeA RE eae 220 5 3 23 show OUI eet ebe ergeet eege Datla tsetse 220 5 3 24 SNOW Goll x e E 221 5 3 25 show dot1X EE 221 5 3 26 show dot1x server Anden 221 E le Ela ue EE 221 5 B20 SHOW ACD EE 221 D329 SNOW ele IT 222 5 3 30 show gun 222 e ie heP EE 222 9 9 SZ SNOW MID E 222 5 3 39 SNOW TOI EE 223 5 3 34 show igmp Ee ee WEE 223 5 3 35 show igmp rtport EE 223 5 3 36 show igmp acl bind oigabt cece eceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 224 5 3 37 show igmp acl bind KOS EE 224 5 3 38 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds emt 224 5 3 39 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds on 225 5 3 40 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlin 00 225 5 3 41 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlog 006 225 5 3 42 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us load
98. ER j From the 802 1x Security menu click on System Protocol The following page is displayed Main Setting System Protocol System Authentication el ae errea OO Port Authentication Main Setting Timer Setting Stands for default value 1JAccounting Interim Interval 300 600 Second 2 All of the Max Request 1 2 10 gl forr gdlee go 200 auto Sr Jee jx Setect f H Select lf setect Jee f setect Sl Jee E Seect x et setect x select I seect setect zl Ti setect 1 setect H Select l select DI Select x Setect Wi DKCH System Protocol Setup Main Setting Label Description System Authentication section Click on the drop down list to enable or disable the 802 1x authentication function of the system If you select Disabled any setting in the Port Authentication section will not take effect Port Authentication section Main Setting Port 01 12 sl Pvc 1 Select the line bridge port range to be listed Select Port Remember to select the checkbox when you want to modify delete the setting of a bridge port or set a bridge port to its default value Enable OFF ON disable enable 802 1x authentication function for the bridge port When 802 1x is disabled the system allows bidirectional normal traffic in this port in spite of its authentication state Default is OFF Accounting Control OFF notif
99. Ether Type Type in the EtherType value hexadecimal Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 106 4 3 3 2 VLAN Priority Remark This option allows you to configure the VLAN priority From the Bridge menu click on Access Control and then VLAN Priority Remark The following page is displayed VLAN Priority Remark PRI Remark Select D GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Click on the VPRI Remark drop down list and select a type of VLAN Priority Remark Available options include Type of Service TOS IP Source IP Destination MAC Source MAC Destination VLAN ID VLAN Priority Regeneration Differentiated Services DSCP Protocol and Ether Type 107 TOS VLAN TOS Priority Remark PRI Remark 1 TOS z No From No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL D Ss sll wc3 DN GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup TOS Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 Query To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to retrieve Delete To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete ADSL D Port 1 sllpvc D Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL
100. Flash Write process has completed successfully the Firmware Update Status shows Firmware has upgraded already You can now restart the system 44 3 Software Introduction 3 1 General Overview The software architecture of the IDL 2402 is shown in the figure below It can be divided into three layers the management layer the OAM amp P layer and the firmware layer Agent Server API lt a safe devo Command Dispatch Sofware Package vo Integrated development ADSLZ 2 Interface sec and API E Service Service Controller Jae aUI el mw Figure 3 1 Management Software Model As in the figure CLI shell SNMP agent and WEB server are in the top most layer management layer of the system software and offering OAM amp P function of the DSLAM based on the conceptual management features as follows H Configuration Management H Performance Management H Fault Management The IDL 2402 uses flash memory as the database DB to store system configuration parameters The firmware layer includes ADSL drivers Memory and I O control etc 45 3 1 1 Features of Management Interface Support CLI SNMP v1 v2c and web based GUI management interface through in band channels Support up to 10 CLI sessions at the same time The in band management connection of the system is the highest priority of all supported in band traffic categories Support Telnet interface for remote operat
101. HlinUpstream Scale 48854 HlinDownstream Scale 38563 Carrier Type TSS SNR ou HN Hoei Carrier Type TSS SNR LN HUNC HLoG 33110235 776 776 776 673 252 1389 39 39 35 HF 235 23 25 28 A OH 45 53 61 70 78 F B 15 15 12 130 137 144 152 2023 1023 1025 1023 1025 1023 1023 1023 1023 1025 1025 1025 1023 1023 1023 1025 1025 1025 1023 1023 1023 1025 1023 1025 1023 1025 1025 1025 1025 1023 1023 1023 The HLOG formula 6 value 10 dB Real values in dB for each carrier over the Downstream passband Far END B E g s 8 8 e e es a alels als g s g 8 8 s e s s 2 2 8 s 2 es 3 5 8 s s s e s s 2 2 28 23 2 88 siel gl s s s s sls a a s a els 3 5 gl s s s elsls alal s a g l g s s s elel e al als s sl glg l g s s s els s alal s sel 3 8 g s s s e s sa 2 s s 2 8 8 ll g s s s e s s a 2 s s 2 5 8 l g g s s s e s 2 2 2 28 2 2 2 8 16 8 s s s s sls 32 2 2 2 2 zs 16 8 s8 s8 s ele slalalelslel sig lgl gl s s s elel e alal sl sls ES el g ss s elel e al als sel Elg BiG S s s s elel s alal s s 2 E8 BiG gl s s s e s s a 2 s8 s 2 g 8 rls gl s s s el s s a 2 s8 s s es s sl gl s s s s sls a32 2 2 s 2 8 8 xl sl gls s s sl sls alale sls sie y l gl s s s e els s al s s ali y l gl s s s els s s al s s ali 9 y l g s s s e 2 2 2 s s ale 8 biSisleieisisgigleieai lo ale 8 biSiSleieisislisle
102. L interface Syntax show runningcfg interface xdsl lt port gt Parameter Name Description port XDSL Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 105 show snmp Description Display SNMP community notify target setting Syntax show snmp community notify target Parameter None 5 3 106 show sntp Description Display SNTP setting Syntax show snip Parameter None 5 3 107 show syslog server DescriptionDisplay IP address of the syslog server Syntax show syslog server Parameter None 5 3 108 show system Description Display system information inventory name performance Syntax show system information inventory name performance Parameter None 5 3 109 show tcm config Description Display TCM Three Color Marking Policer configuration Syntax show tcm config Parameter None 5 3 110 show tcm policer Description Display TCM Policer Binding Table Syntax show tcm policer Parameter None 243 5 3 111 show temperature Description Display system temperature Syntax show temperature Parameter None 5 3 112 show time Description Display current time Syntax showtime Parameter None 5 3 113 show uptime Description Display System up time and CPU loading Syntax show uptime Parameter None 5 3 114 show version Description Display CLI software version Syntax show version Parameter None 5 3 115 show version detail Description Display CLI software version and system information S
103. Label Description Select Index are 1 4 5 8 117 120 Index This field shows the profile index Modem Features functions for better performance Direction DS downstream US upstream Aggregate Power Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power 0 25 5dB PSD Level Maximum PSD level Valid values are ADSL2 60 40 dB Hz DS 60 38 dB Hz US ReADSL2 60 37 dB Hz DS 60 32 9 dB Hz US ADSL2 60 40 dB Hz DS 60 38 dB Hz US 149 Click on the drop down list to select the range of profile index Options Select ADSL2 ReADSL2 ADSL2 and Enable Disable special modem Only for ADSL2 Valid options are Standard CA100 CA110 CA120 CA130 CA1 40 CA150 PSD Shape CA160CA170 CA180 CA190 CA200 CA210 CA220 CA230 CA240 CA250 CA260 CA270 CA280 PBO Power backoff operation mode OFF ON Maximum aggregate receive power over a set of subcarriers It ranges ENN from 25 5 to 25 5 dBm with 0 1 dB steps 150 4 4 1 5 TCA Profile This option allows you to setup the PM counter threshold for TCA threshold crossing alert From the ADSL menu click on Profile and then TCA Profile The following page is displayed ADSL TCA Profile ja Page1 of 16 D Modify Delete The First Index is default profile cant modify amp delete An Interval_TCA s value range from 0 to 900 sec A Day_TCA s value range from 0 to 86400 Sec Th
104. Mandatory 245 5 4 Configure Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Configure execution mode 5 4 1 access list Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 2 account add Description Syntax Parameter Go to access list execution mode from Configure mode access list None Add new account account add lt name gt account add lt name gt password lt password gt comment lt comment gt account add lt name gt password lt password gt level lt level gt comment lt comment gt account add lt name gt password lt password gt password expiration lt day number gt Name Description lt name gt ID name max 31 characters Only 0 9 a z A Z and symbol _ are accepted for account name For example abc_12 XYZ 10 1 is a valid user name Note that the IDL 2402 does not accept user names beginning with a digital number For example 123abc or 123456 are not a valid name Default value Type Mandatory lt password gt Input password max 31 characters Default value space char Type Optional lt level gt Set access level Valid values superuser engineer guest Default value guest Type Optional lt comment gt Set comment max 31 characters Default value space char Type Optional 246 lt day number gt Set password expiration days 0 disable Default value Type Optional 5 4 3 account delete
105. Mount the shelf on the rack using the large screws provided The procedure to connect and wire the system is as follows 2 2 1 System Requirements Workstation with Windows NT 2000 XP RJ 45 cables RJ 11 cables Telco 50 cables RS 232 console cable lt Optional gt MDF Patch Panel Model No IDL PAN 48 2 2 2 Installation Procedure Step 1 Ground the IP DSLAM by connecting a grounded wire Optional Ground Connections This section provides the grounding rule for the IDL 2402 All remote system sites must be properly grounded for optimum system performance E In Central Office There should be a CO GND that is adequately grounded If the measured resistance from the grounding screw on the rear panel of the DSLAM refer to below figure to CO GND is less than 5 Ohm then it can be assumed that the system is well grounded If the measured resistance is larger than 5 Ohm it is recommended to connect the grounding screw to CO GND using 14 or 12 AWG wire gauge conductor In Remote Cabinet The IDL 2402 should be grounded by connecting a 14 or 12 AWG conductor between the grounding screw on the rear panel of the DSLAM refer to below figure and the earth ground or main grounding bar The resistance between the chassis and the grounding bar should be less than 25 Ohm Rear Panel Connection IDL 2402 grounding screw on the rear panel 23 Step 2 Connecting the ADSL LINE and PHONE interfaces The IDL 2402
106. N alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 83 rmon alarm lt index gt startup _alarm DescriptionRMON startup alarm Rising threshold alarm Falling threshold alarm or Both rising and falling threshold alarm Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt startup_alarm rising falling both Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 84 rmon alarm lt index gt variable Description Source sample in statistic table Variable Description rx_broadcast Monitoring rx broadcast packets rx_bytes Monitoring rx bytes packets rx_dropped Monitoring rx dropped packets rx_err_aligment Monitoring rx error aligment packets 268 Syntax Parameter rx_fragments Monitoring rx fragments packets rx_jabber Monitoring rx jabber packets rx_multicast Monitoring rx multicast packets rx_oversize Monitoring rx oversize packets rx_packets Monitoring rx packets rx_undersize Monitoring rx undersize packets tx_single_collision Monitoring tx single collision packets txrx_frames 64 Monitoring tx 64 octets txrx_frames_127 Monitoring tx 65 to 127 octets txrx_frames_ 255 Monitoring tx 128 to 255 octets txrx_frames_511 Monitoring tx 256 to 511 octets txrx_frames_1023 Monitoring tx 512 to 1023 octets
107. Near End Initialize fail s Modem Failed Initialization events only for Near End User Cell CU User Total Cell Count only for Near End Delineate Cell CD Delineated Total Cell Count only for Near End HEC ATM Header Error Count IBE Idle Cell Bit Error Count Channel CVs Channel PM Code Violations Channel FECCs Channel PM Forward Error Corrections 205 5 CLI Command Reference Introduction Access to the Operations System OS Network Element NE system is protected by a logon security system You can log on to the NE with the user name and password After three failed logon attempts the system refuses further attempts After you log on the system monitors the interface for periods of inactivity If the interface is inactive for too long you are automatically logged off All the NEs have the same initial user name admin and password admin You should change the password as soon as possible because the initial password is known to anyone who reads this manual You can also change the user name or add additional user names Use the account add command to enter a new user identification password and authorization level The system can handle one local logon session and at least four remote OS sessions Connect Interface Interface Parameter Console Baud rate 9600 Data bit 8 Parity None Stop bit 1 Telnet Port 23 SSH Port 22 In Win
108. Networking amp Communication IP DSLAM Switch IDL 2402 User s Manual Copyright Copyright C 2008 PLANET Technology Corp All rights reserved The products and programs described in this User s Manual are licensed products of PLANET Technology This User s Manual contains proprietary information protected by copyright and this User s Manual and all accompanying hardware software and documentation are copyrighted No part of this User s Manual may be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form by any means by electronic or mechanical Including photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use and without the prior express written permission of PLANET Technology Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccu
109. OFF RESET Syntax line status service on off reset Parameter None E 5 11 IPoA Configure Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the IPoA configure mode 5 11 1 brasmac Description Display Broadband RAS MAC address by index Syntax brasmac lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Broadband RAS MAC Table Index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 11 2 brasmac list Description Show Broadband RAS MAC address table Syntax brasmac list Parameter None 5 11 3 cpriority Description Customer VLAN Priority setting Syntax cpriority lt prio ID gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Customer VLAN Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory E 5 11 4 cvlan Description Customer VLAN setting Syntax cvlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Customer VLAN ID number Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 11 5 ipoa status Description IPoA Status setting enable disable IPoA Syntax _ipoa status enable disable Parameter None 5 11 6 max mac Description Port based allowed maximum number of MAC addresses Syntax max mac lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Number of MAC addresses Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 5 11 7 pve Description
110. P lt 88 gt ospf OSPF lt 89 gt Default value Type Mandatory 5 14 10 ipprotocol list Description Show IP protocol priority list Syntax ipprotocol list Parameter None 5 14 11 srcip Description Specify source IP address of packets to remark vlan priority Syntax srcip lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt ip lt ipv4 address gt lt netmask gt srcip lt numbers gt list scrip lt number gt disable 340 Parameter 5 14 12 srcip list Description Syntax Parameter Name Description lt number gt Source IP address priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt lt port gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Destination IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt netmask gt Subnet mask Valid values xxx XXX XXX XXX Xxx 0 255 Default value Type Optional Show source IP address priority list srcip list None 341 5 14 13 sremac Description Specify source MAC of packets to remark vlan priority Syntax srcmac lt number gt prio l
111. RADIUS Server Modify Delete RADIUS amp Local Profile Setup Label Description Authentication Method section In this section operators setup four AAA methods for the system to use and the priority order is Method1 gt Method2 gt Method3 gt Method4 If a user cannot be authenticated when the system uses Method1 the system will then try to use Method2 and so on Click on the AAA method drop down list and select a RADIUS server index or the local profile which has been already configured in the RADIUS Server section or Local Profile section At last click on Modify button RADIUS Server section Select Index n Remember to select the checkbox when you want to modify or delete a RADIUS server entry RADIUS Server IP Type in the IP address of the remote RADIUS server Authentication Port Type in the port number for RADIUS Authentication in the Layer 4 header Default is 1812 Accounting Port Type in the port number for RADIUS Accounting in the Layer 4 header Default is 1813 82 Type in the maximum allowable times of continuously failed Max kall authentication attempts VLAN ID Type in the VID of the VLAN which the RADIUS server belongs to Secret ID Type in the authentication key in text format Local Profile section Page 1 Profile 01 08 Di Click on the drop down list and select the profile range to be listed There are total 8 pages
112. Restore the Configuration Configuration Import Export The IDL 2402 provides the configuration preservation feature that the configuration database is stored in flash memory two partitions available In addition to the configuration preservation feature the IDL 2402 also provides the configuration export import feature A import File Write Download B Import File Load Remote C Export File D Save Running o E Reload FLASH Restore Factory G Flash Boot Point Select WEB GUI Li e Download Config EEN TFTP SERVER FALSH DEVICE SS System Config l a ee ee System Config2 Boot Point Select EE H a EE DB Configuration Concept For CLI Suppose that TFTP Server IP address is 172 16 100 181 and configuration file name is testcfg A Import file from TFTP Server to the Download Config and then write Download Config to the Flash partition 1 or partition 2 Ex enable configure remotecfg login 172 16 100 181 get testcfg write partition lt number gt 32 B Import file from TFTP Server to the Download Config and then load Download Config to the Running Config Ex enable configure remotecfg login 172 16 100 181 get testcfg load C Export export file from Running config to the TFTP server Ex enable configure runningcfg login 172 16 100 181 put testcfg D Save Running config to the Flash partition 1 or partition 2 Ex enable config
113. SK Type in the subnet mask Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 109 IP Destination VLAN IP Destination Priority Remark PRI Remark 3 IP Destination il No From 1 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Next No 2 Destination o D P P msp fo fo pP Priorty oun O z Create GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup IP Destination Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 Query To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to retrieve Delete To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA GIGA cicat bridge port Source IP Type in the IP address of the coming source MASK Type in the subnet mask Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table ET MAC Source VLAN MAC Source Priority Remark PRI Remark HMAC Source D No From 1 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete eca z cica DN
114. ScrCdvt vbr shp lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt scr lt scr gt mbs lt mbs gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt lt SCI gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory Sustained Cell Rate Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt mbs gt Maximum Burst Size Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 333 5 14 Priority List Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Priority List execution mode 5 14 1 ds Description Set Differentiated Service of packets to remark VLAN priority Show Differentiated Service priority list entry Disable Differentiated Service priority list entry Syntax ds lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt dscp lt dscp gt ds lt numbers list ds lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Differentiated Service priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL
115. Set VPI and VCI Syntax pvc lt VPI gt lt VCl gt Parameter Name Description lt VPI gt Virtual Path Identifier Valid values 0 255 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 313 5 11 8 pvc atmdesc Description Syntax Parameter lt VClI gt Virtual Channel Identifier Valid values 21 32 65535 Default value 35 Type Mandatory List ATM traffic descriptor pvc atmdesc None 5 11 9 pve atmdesc plc Description Syntax Parameter Set ATM police Rx descriptor pvc atmdesc plc lt number gt Name Description lt number gt ATM descriptor number Valid values Enter pvc atmdesc command to see the descriptor list Default value Type Mandatory 5 11 10 pve atmdesc shp Set ATM shaped Tx descriptor Description Syntax Parameter pvc atmdesc shp lt number gt Name Description lt number gt ATM descriptor number Valid values Enter pvc atmdesc command to see the descriptor list Default value Type Mandatory 314 5 11 11 pve encapsulation Description Set Encapsulation type Syntax pvc encapsulation llc vemux Parameter None 5 11 12 uplink gigabit Description Set GBE uplink mode Syntax uplink lt port gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 Default value Type Mandatory 315
116. account was first created Last Login Shows the day when a user last login Comment Description about the user account up to 31 characters When a new account is added for example Test1 is added When user Test intends to login for the first time he will be asked to change his password and then login with the new password 76 4 1 12 Duplicator This option allows you to duplicate all partial the configurations of one selected line port as a template to other ports as many as you want From the System menu click on Duplicator The following page is displayed Select the content of configurations ADSL line configuration ADSL profiles or you want to duplicate first Then specify the port number as the template the source port to be copied and select the target ports to which the template is going to be copied At last click on Paste to apply System Duplicator Templated ADSL Port 1 Poste To be duplicated ADSL Port oi oa lea lene Seel Get orl es eet md aan eat oH hoo hcg ell WE EE 1 Eet llc at ee 4 2 802 1x Security 4 2 1 System Protocol This option allows you to enable disable 802 1x authentication function of the system and setup the 802 1x authentication mechanism for each line bridge port Before you setup 802 1x for a line bridge port you must create the ADSL PVC bridge port first Authentication IS i Server Auth uthenticator RADIUS Supplicant S line user
117. adsl configuration mode Syntax adsl config Parameter None 5 6 3 ipoa Description Enter IPoA RFC 2684 routed mode Syntax ipoa Parameter None 289 5 7 ATM Bridge Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the ATM Bridge execution mode 5 7 1 accfrm Description Set acceptable frame type untagged only tagged only or all Syntax accfrm all tag untag Parameter None 5 7 2 accounting disable Description Disable accounting after authentication Syntax accounting disable Parameter None 5 7 3 accounting enable Description Enable accounting after authentication Syntax accounting disable Parameter None 5 7 4 auth disable Description Disable port authentication Syntax auth disable Parameter None 5 7 5 auth enable Description Enable port authentication Syntax auth enable Parameter None 290 5 7 6 auth sever timeout Description 802 1x Timeout for Radius Retries Syntax auth server timeout lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Timeout for Radius Retries Valid values 1 65534 Default value 60 Type Mandatory 5 7 7 auth supp timeout Description 802 1x Timeout for requesting the supplicant to retry Syntax auth supp timeout lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Timeout for Supplicant retries Valid values 1 65534 Default value 60 Type Mandatory 5 7 8 auth tx period D
118. al 5 4 45 igmp rtport list Description Show IGMP router port list Syntax igmp rtport list lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 257 5 4 46 igmp timeout Description IGMP timeout setting BC LMQT MRT Query URI Syntax igmp timeout bc Imqt mrt query uri lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Timeout value Valid values 1 500 second Default value BC 400 LMQT 1 MRT 10 Query 125 URI 1 Type Mandatory 5 4 47 igmp version Description Set IGMP protocol version Syntax igmp version v1 v2 v3 Parameter None 5 4 48 interface gigabit Description Go to Gigabit Ethernet Interface execution mode from Configure mode Syntax interface gigabit lt port gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 49 interface xdsl Description Go to xDSL Interface execution mode from Configure mode Syntax interface xdsl lt port gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 258 5 4 50 mac spoofing detect Description Enable Disable MAC spoofing detection mac spoofing detect enable disable Syntax Parameter None 5 4 51 mac spoofing detect log D
119. al to Noise Ratio Margin SNRM Attainable Net Data Rate ATTNDR Far end Actual Aggregate Transmit Power ACTATP Near End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power ACTATP 56 3 6 Cluster Feature The IDL 2402 supports Cluster feature that can make a group of NEs network elements work together as a single NE from the management point of view Operators can manage the NEs in a cluster called cluster nodes via the same single IP address in terms of CLI Web based GUI or SNMP based management interfaces The IDL 2402 currently provides cluster feature that a cluster can include up to four cluster members NEs There are one Master and the other members are all Slaves in a cluster The Master works as a gateway of the Slaves and it also can forward CLI Web SNMP commands to the destination Slave The Slaves can execute the commands and respond to the Master It uses star topology for conducting a Clustering Management group Master Slave Slave IDL 2402 IDL 2402 IDL2402 enmms GBE GBE R GBE Uplink Wer Uplink LAN GBE Uplink Figure 3 2 Cluster network topology Star Before you group a Master and a Slave IPDSLAM some parameters need to be well configured 1 2 Cluster domain name The group name for a cluster must be the same on Master and Slave Cluster IP address IP address to be used for remote management when Master and Slave are grouped together NE cluster name A name to identify Master or Slave Set
120. all lt port gt bridge 20 0 0 eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 232 5 3 61 show interface xdsl all lt port gt CellCOUNT 00 0 2 e eee e eee eeeee 232 5 3 62 show interface xdsl all lt port gt counter 0 0 cee eeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeee 232 5 3 63 show interface xdsl all lt port gt mpog 233 5 3 64 show interface xdsl all eportzlwe 233 5 3 65 show interface xdsl all lt port gt van 233 5 3 66 show interface bridge ENEE 233 5 3 67 show interface Counter EEN 234 5 3 68 show interface gigabit lt port gt bridge ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 234 5 3 69 show interface gigabit lt port gt counter ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 5 3 70 show interface gigabit lt port gt VIAN cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 5 3 71 show mac spoofing detect CONPIQ ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 235 5 3 72 show mac spoofing detect log ee 235 5 3 73 Show Management all c ccccccccsedecdeeedeeceneesec eens dencdededendtenddgectedeceen lee 235 5 3 74 show Management oe 235 5 3 75 show pm lt port gt adsl EEN 235 5 3 76 show pm E en Ee EEN 236 5 3 77 show port template parameter ee 236 5 3 78 show priority list EE 236 5 3 79 show eer EE E 237 5 3 80 show eelere TE e Et 237 5 3 81 show priority list ethertype ee 237 5 3 82 show priority list protoco eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 237 5 3 83 show priority liSt erop 238 5 3 84 show priori
121. alue Valid values 0 900 Default value Type Mandatory 362 5 21 Dot1x Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Dot1x execution mode 5 21 1 auth method Description Set priorities of the different authentication methods Syntax auth method lt index gt none radius_1 radius_2 radius_3 profile Parameter Name Description index Authentication method priority Valid values 1 4 Default value Type Mandatory 5 21 2 server lt numbers gt ip Description Set RADIUS Server IP address Syntax server lt index gt ip lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description index RADIUS Server index Valid values 1 3 Default value Type Mandatory ipv4 address RADIUS Server IP address Valid values Default value Type Mandatory 363 5 21 3 server lt number gt auth port Description Set the port number for RADIUS Authentication in the Layer 4 header Syntax server lt index gt auth port lt number gt Parameter Name Description index RADIUS Server index Valid values 1 3 Default value Type Mandatory number RADIUS Server authentication port Valid values Default value 1812 Type Mandatory 5 21 4 server lt number gt acct port Description Set the port number for RADIUS Accounting in the Layer 4 header Syntax server lt index gt acct p
122. alues of current 15 min interval and current 1 day interval 2 Statistics history at 15 minute basis The system stores previous 96 statistics of PM parameters at 15 min interval for retrieving 3 Statistics history at 1 day basis The system stores previous 1 statistics of PM parameters at 1 day interval for retrieving Most of the performance parameter thresholds are user programmable The IDL 2402 uses a threshold crossing alert TCA to notify the management system when one of the counts during a measurement interval exceeds its threshold The TCA contains the following information Specific interface involved Error condition identifying the measurement type Value of the parameter Occurrence date and time of the event The performance management also provides the traffic counter including transmitted packets error packets and discarded packets for each interface network and subscriber interface and ATM cell counter in both transmit and receive direction Users can observe these data through CLI and Web GUI ADSL PM The IDL 2402 provides the following ADSL PM statistics Item Description ATUC_LOS Loss of signal count ATUC_LOF Loss of frame count ATUC_LOM Loss of margin count ATUC_LOL Loss of link count ATUC_ES Errored Seconds ATUC_SES Severely Errored Seconds ATUC_UAS Unavailable Seconds ATUC_RelnitCounter The number of times the modem left showtime and tried to re initialize
123. ame and password are as follows User Name admin Password admin Click on the Sign in button You are now ready to configure your DSLAM using the Web Configuration Tool Web Interface Login Username ab Password geess Sign in a Level 1 SuperUser R W Management all Level 2 Engineer R W Disabled from User Account a Level 3 Guest Read only Figure 4 1 Web Configuration Tool login page 58 4 The following page is displayed This is the homepage of the Web Configuration Tool System Information ACCESS LOGIN Access Level System Date FW Boot Active DB Current DB l Super user 2008 09 09 Partition Partition 1 Partition 1 SYSTEM VERSION Hardware Firmware Software Web Circuit 1 24 G 1 00805 1 00805 Mx 06 17b AnnexA JIGA STATUS Gigal SYSLED ALM LED Bridge MAC Gigal MAC Config Enabled e oO 00 30 4F 71 99 0A 00 30 4F 71 99 09 DSLAM Terms and conditions Copyright 2007 Figure 4 2 Web Configuration Tool homepage 59 About Web Configuration Tool Pages The Web Configuration Tool provides a series of web pages for users to setup and configure the IDL 2402 System These pages are organized into six main topics including System Bridge ADSL Traffic SNMP and Maintenance You can select each topic from the menu on the left hand side of the main window Table 4 1 lists the various pages of the web configuration tool The exact information displayed on each web page depends on the specific c
124. and 8 profiles per page up to 64 local profiles can be set in our system Username Type in the username for authentication Password Type in the password for authentication 83 4 3 Bridge 4 3 1 Interface Setup 4 3 1 1 GIGA Bridge This option allows you to setup the GBE trunk bridge interface From the Bridge menu click on Interface Setup and then GIGA Bridge The following page is displayed GIGA Bridge Model ett zap 1 Mexmac 1024 tal Su Tagged zllre Stack zl ingress ON slaee Frm 2 4LL Frame D Isolation ON D Modify Query ADSL PVC CONFIGURATION STATIC VLAN GIGA Trunk Bridge Setup Label Description Click on the drop down list and specify the trunk port to be an Uplink or User Mode especially for system stacking VID Type in the default port VLAN ID Valid value is 1 4094 Max MAC Type in the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the giga bridge port 1 4096 VLAN setting for the traffic Includes three drop down lists Pri O 7 Set the default VLAN priority level UnTagged Tagged Select to untag tag the outgoing upstream direction for trunk bridge ports packets If UnTagged is selected a double tagged packet will leave single tagged the outer most VLAN tag is removed and a single tagged VLAN packet will leave untagged no Stack Stack Disable Enable N 1 VLAN stacking our system adds the default VLAN ta
125. arked red if it exceeds the PIR Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn t exceed the EIR Rate Limit Policer Profile Rate Limit Typel Policer Profile 7 Page 01 of 4 D Modify Delete Query CIR Committed Info Rate EIR Excess Info Rate LBS Leaky Bucket Size No share Silb je aa awa va select Sllbaee Si E o Se ER Ss sect see TTT ma me eme SC emp 421s Rate Limit Poicer Setup Label Description Rate Limit Type Click on this drop down list and select the item you want to setup Page 01 of 4 D Click on this drop down list and select a page to be displayed Select Select the checkbox when you want to create modify delete this entry Share mode All the bridge ports which bind to the share mode policer profile will share the same Leaky Bucket defined by the CIR EIR parameters So in Share mode system only creates one Leaky Bucket for all the binding bridge ports Share Mode No Share mode Every bridge port which bind to the non share policer profile will have its own Leaky Bucket Single Single Leaky Bucket For SLB there is one controlling parameter CIR LB Mode Dual Dual Leaky Bucket For DLB there are two controlling parameters CIR and EIR CIR Committed Information Rate 1536 1G bits per second controls the number of tokens in the first bucket CBS bucket EIR Excess Informa
126. atistics Click on the leftmost drop down list to select interface giga port or DSL line port if line interface is selected you must further click on the middle and rightmost drop down list to select the line port number and PVC number At last click on Query to get data of that interface GBE interface Ethernet Statistics v orca Port D XDSL Port 1 G Statistics Hame Giga Port 1 MTU Size 1536 Queue LEN Last Change 0 Specification D Description ig Ethernet Ip Bytes 0 pi Broadcast Packets BF Input Discard Packets 911 Input Multicast Packets 1472 Input Unicast Packets dem Input Not Unicast Packets 929 Input Error Packets 0 Input Unknown Protocol Packets 0 Output Bytes OO Output Broadcast Packets 41 Output Discard Packets en Output Multicast Packets ge Output Unicast Packets gg Output Not Unicast Packets 11 Output Error Packets 0 190 ADSL line PVC xDSL Port Sl xDSL ze ie Pvc 1 sl Statistics Name MTU Size Queue Length Last Change Specification L Input Bytes Input Discard Packets put Multicast Packets Input Unicast Packets Input Not Unicast Packets Input Error Packets Output Bytes 1749 Output Broadcast Packets Output Discard Packets 0 Output Not Unicast Packets 66 utput Error Packets 0 191 4 7 6 3 ATM Statistics This option allows you to query the ATM Statistics From the Maintenance menu
127. ault value Type Mandatory 232 5 3 63 show interface xdsl all lt port gt ipoa Description Display IPoA RFC 2684 information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt ipoa Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 64 show interface xdsl all lt port gt vc Description Display VC information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt vc Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 65 show interface xdsl all lt port gt vlan Description Display VLAN information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt vlan Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 66 show interface bridge Description Display All interface Bridge information Syntax show interface bridge Parameter None 233 5 3 67 show interface counter Description Display All interface Ethernet packet counter Syntax show interface counter Parameter None 5 3 68 show interface gigabit lt port gt bridge Description Display Bridge information of the Gigabit Ethernet interface or by Gigabit Ethernet port Syntax show interface gigabit lt port gt bridge Parameter Name Description port
128. bridge port or GIGA bridge port In order to provide basic support for classes of service to the Internet Protocol The IP protocol header contains what is known as the ToS Type of Service bits TOS Click on the drop down list and select incoming TOS value range 0 7 then you can create the mapping between TOS and VLAN priority Priority Out a on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 108 IP Source VLAN IP Source Priority Rernark PRI Remark LP Source DN No From 1 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL D Port 1 z Pvc 1 D Next No 2 Source IP p fp nb MASK p p pp Priority ut zl Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup IP Source Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this ue auch button to retrieve Delete To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA ADSL P rt 1 Pvc 1 JI 7 bridge port Source IP Type in the IP address of the coming source MA
129. c level Both levels are alarm level configurable and can be Major and Minor All the alarms are mask able Fault management provides the alarm output through hardware output interface on the system front panel and visible indicator LED The alarm status indications are automatically generated as a result of certain events conditions The IDL 2402 supports query of all current alarm status It is also able to keep 256 records of historical alarms and events respectively The IDL 2402 provides the ability to group alarms in a hierarchical alarm presentation scheme Alarms of the same rank can exist at the same time A lower ranking alarm will be demoted if a higher ranking alarm is raised for the same object For example if a far end LOS is raised on a circuit and then a far end LPR is raised on the circuit the LPR alarm stands and the LOS closes The alarm hierarchy used in the IDL 2402 system is shown in the following table Table 3 3 IDL 2402 Alarm Hierarchy Priority Alarm Type Highest all activation failures ADSL_COMMF_FE or ADSL_NOPEER _FE far end LPR near end LOS or far end LOS Lowest near end LOF or far end LOF near end and far end are independent for example FE LOS does not restrain NE LOF Note 1 LOM LCD and NCD are not included in the alarm hierarchy they re treated independently 2 The PM counters LPR LOS and LOF follow the alarm hierarchy rule When these alarms exist at the same time
130. ce Furthermore the PLANET IDL 2402 provides many features such as QoS VLAN Multicast Bandwidth Management Traffic Prioritization and Access Control List With the advanced QoS features IDL 2402 is an ideal solution for next generation broadband network to deliver rich video contents DSL POTS and VoIP service over ADSL2 connection 1 1 Product Features 24 Port ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 subscriber interface with build in POTS splitter DMT data rate Downstream up to 25 Mbps Upstream up to 3Mbps 1000Base T uplink interface Web GUI based management Local RS 232 CLI and Ethernet SNMP Telnet SSH management Firmware upgradeable via FTP Configuration backup and restoration via TFTP Supports IPSec L2TP PPTP VPN pass through Supports 4K MAC address Supports IEEE 802 1q Tag based VLAN and Protocol based VLAN Layer 2 3 filtering based on MAC IP Protocol Port number and Ether Type Access Control List by MAC IP Protocol Port number Traffic prioritization 802 1p Supports IGMP snooping proxy per IGMP v1 v2 and v3 FAN alarm indicating 0 gt gt gt gt gt 0 gt o o o o 0 Temperature monitoring and system overheating trap functionality 1 2 Package Contents IDL 2402 Unit x 1 AC Power Cord x 1 CD Containing User s Manual QIG x 1 Quick Installation Guide x 1 2 Meter Telco 50 Cable x 2 Console Cable x 1 Rack mounting x 2 gt gt gt gt Screw Packag
131. ckets Tx Bytes Monitoring Tx bytes Tx Packets Monitoring Tx packets Tx Multicast Monitoring Tx multicast Tx Broadcast Monitoring Tx broadcast Utilization Monitoring Tx Utilization 198 Alarm This option allows you to configure the RMON alarm setting This table controls the conditions on which alarms occur Click on New to create an entry To modify an entry click on the index to select the entry type in new value and then click on Modify To delete an entry click on the index to select the entry and then click on Delete Remote Monitoring Alarm Select Typel Alarm D Next No 3 Interval 1800 Owner RMONS oip DropEvents D NN SampleType ABSOLUTE x Startup larm RISING x Rise Threshold Index 0 0 Rise Event Index 0 Fall Threshold 0 Fall Event new Modify Delete Query 1800 RMON2 DropEvents DropEvents Sampling ABSOLUTE Sampling ABSOLUTE Startup By RISING Startup By RISING RMON Alarm setup Label Description interval The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds Value range 0 2147483647 0 disable Owner RMON alarm owner max 31 characters OID Variable Click on the drop down list to select ETH statistics variable and index of ETH Statistics table entries RMON alarm sample type includes ABSOLUTE the value of the selected variable will be compared directly wi
132. click on Performance Monitoring and then ATM Statistics The following page is displayed ATM Statistics ADSL Port 1 sl Show Tx Cells 7 Query Auto Update l Query ATM Statistics Label Description ADSL Port Click on this button to select line port Auto Update Click on this checkbox to auto update the displayed statistics Show Click on this drop down list to select Tx Rx or All Tx amp Rx data Query Click on this button to query current statistics 192 4 7 6 4 RMON This option allows you to configure and query the RMON Statistics The IDL 2402 supports performance statistics defined in RMON MIB groups 1 Ethernet statistics 2 history control 3 alarm and 9 event per RFC 2819 for all network uplink ports From the Maintenance menu click on Performance Monitoring and then RMON The following page is displayed Select type of RMON table in the drop down list Remote Monitoring Select Typel Select x 193 ETH Statistics This option is for displaying the Ethernet interface RMON data Click on the Data Source drop down list and select GBE1 Type in an owner name and then click on New button to create a new ETH statistics entry An owner is the entity that configured this entry and is therefore using the resources assigned to it Remote Monitoring ETH Statistics Select TypelETH Statistics v Next No 4 Data Source GBE1 e Owner RMON4 NEVY a
133. click on VLAN Configuration and then Static Allowed IP The following page is displayed To make bridge port work according to this Static Allowed IP table the IP allowed function must be enabled refer to section 4 3 1 Static Allowed IP CONFIG ALLOWED IP GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE Click on the drop down lists to select ADSL port and PVC number then type in VID and allowed source IP that can pass through the VLAN 98 4 3 2 5 MAC Spoofing This option allows you to enable disable anti MAC Spoofing function and MAC Spoofing detection log function From the Bridge menu click on VLAN Configuration and then MAC Spoofing The following page is displayed MAC Spoofing Spoofing ON sl Lol OFF Di Set Query GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE MAC Spoofing Setup Label Description Spoofing Click on the drop down list to select OFF The system is able to provide service to users with duplicate MAC addresses ON The system is able to deny service to users with duplicate Log Click on the drop down list to select OFF No log of MAC spoofing data when detected ON The system provides log when duplicated MAC addresses detected Set Click on this button to apply the setting Query Click on this button to get the MAC spoofing information the Log function must be enabled 99 4 3 3 Access Control 4 3 3 1 Filtering This option allows you to setup the filter r
134. cluster Description Display cluster configuration Display cluster member list Display cluster status Syntax show cluster config member status Parameter None 5 3 22 show cpu Description Display CPU information Syntax show cpu Parameter None 5 3 23 show dot1x Description Display 802 1x information Syntax show dotix Parameter None 220 5 3 24 show dot1x profile Description Display 802 1x profile Syntax show dot1x profile Parameter None 5 3 25 show dot1x server Description Display 802 1x server configuration Syntax show dot1x server Parameter None 5 3 26 show dot1x server lt index gt Description Display 802 1x server configuration by index 1 3 Syntax show dot1x server lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt Display 802 1x server configuration by index Valid values 1 3 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 27 show dsl line identify Description Display DSL line identify information Syntax show dsl line identify Parameter None 5 3 28 show fdb Description Display all MAC learning table or by VLAN ID Syntax show fdb vlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 221 5 3 29 show fdbstatic Description Display all static MAC forwarding table or by index Syntax show fdbstatic lt index gt Parameter Name Des
135. command to 357 see all the operation modes Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 9 pbomode Description Set power backoff operation mode ON OFF Syntax pbomode us on off Parameter None 5 19 10 power mgt disable Description Disable power management function for ADSL Syntax power mgt disable Parameter None 5 19 11 power mgt D enable Description Allow autonomous L2 state entry exit Syntax power mgt 2 enable Parameter None 5 19 12 power mgt I2_I3 enable Description Allow autonomous L2 and L3 state entry exit Syntax power mgt D D enable Parameter None 5 19 13 power mgt 10 time Description Set the minimum time in seconds between Exit from L2 low power state and the next Entry into the L2 low power state Syntax power mgt l0 time lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt LO Time value Valid values 0 255 sec Default value Type Mandatory 358 5 19 14 power mgt 2 time Description Set minimum time in seconds between an Entry into L2 low power state and the first L2 low power trim request and between two consecutive L2 power trim requests Syntax power mgt I2 time lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt L2 Time value Valid values 0 255 sec Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 15 power mgt I2 atpr Description Set maximum aggregate transmit power reduction in dB that is a
136. cription lt index gt Static MAC forwarding table number Valid values 1 512 Default value Type Optional 5 3 30 show firmware Description Display firmware update status or partition information Note the Active status of the firmware partition information means the active partition for next time restart not current running partition Ex local show firmware partition Current Version 1 00B05 Partition Version Date Status 1 1 00B05t1 2008 7 4 2 1 00B05 2008 6 18 Active Syntax show firmware status partition Parameter None 5 3 31 show help Description Display Help Syntax show help Parameter None 5 3 32 show http Description Display HTTP Web port Syntax show http Parameter None 222 5 3 33 show igmp Description Display IGMP information Syntax show igmp Parameter None 5 3 34 show igmp group Description Display IGMP VLAN group list Syntax show igmp group list show igmp group ip lt ipv4 address gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt show igmp group ip lt ipv4 address gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt src list show igmp group ip lt ipv4 address gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt src lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description ipv4 address IGMP group address Valid values 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 The range of addresses from 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 is reserved for the use of routing protocols and other low level topology discovery or maintenance protocols Default value Type
137. d function on a bridge port this bridge port will work according to the Static Allowed IP table refer to section 4 3 2 90 So you need to define the source IP addresses that bind to this bridge port Then the IP packets that contain these source IP addresses can pass through this bridge port otherwise the packets will be blocked Select the check box to copy specified circuit to all remainder circuits in Sch current page Modif Click on the radio button to select the bridge port you want to modify y Change the parameter values and then click on Modify Query Click on this button to get the most recent data 91 4 3 2 VLAN Configuration 4 3 2 1 Static VLAN This option allows you to configure the static VLAN table From the Bridge menu click on VLAN Configuration and then Static VLAN The following page is displayed Click on the radio button to select CONFIG VLAN to configure static VLAN for the bridge ports or SHOW VLAN to display the VLAN table CONFIG VLAN Click on the drop down list to select ADSL or GIGA port and then select a port and PVC if ADSL is selected Once you have selected the bridge interface its current static VLAN setting is displayed To add a new VLAN member type in VID for the New VID field and then select Tagged UnTagged for VLAN Tag ON OFF for Isolation and VLAN priority level specify a number or reserve the original value for Priority At last click on Create
138. datory 5 4 61 priority queue atm queue0 weight Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 0 Syntax priority queue atm queue0 weight lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 0 Valid values 1 255 Default value 10 Type Mandatory 261 5 4 62 priority queue atm queue1 weight Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 1 Syntax priority queue atm queue1 weight lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 1 Valid values 1 255 Default value 20 Type Mandatory 5 4 63 priority queue atm queue2 weight Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 2 Syntax priority queue atm queue2 weight lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 2 Valid values 1 255 Default value 30 Type Mandatory 5 4 64 priority queue atm queue3 weight Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 3 Syntax priority queue atm queue3 weight lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 3 Valid values 1 255 Default value 40 Type Mandatory 5 4 65 priority queue atm scheduling Description Set priority queue scheduling only support SPQ mode or support SQP and WFQ modes Syntax priority queue atm scheduling sqp spq
139. ddress count lt count gt ping ipv4 address size lt size gt ping ipv4 address count lt count gt size lt size gt Name Description ipv4 address IPv4 address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value count The number of PING packets sent Default value size Packet size Default value 5 3 3 show access list bcrate Description Syntax Parameter Display all broadcast rate limiting list show access list bcrate None 5 3 4 show access list dstip Description Syntax Parameter Display all dest IP deny access list or by index show access list dstip lt index gt Name Description lt index gt Destination IP deny access list number Valid values 1 256 216 Default value Type Optional 5 3 5 show access list dstmac Description Display all destination MAC address deny access list or by index Syntax show access list dstmac lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt Destination MAC deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 6 show access list ethertype Description Display all EtherType deny access list or by index Syntax show access list ethertype lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt EtherType deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 7 show access list i
140. deine neds duns cucetoes voduiuas A 313 EEN e 313 hn E 313 5 118 E ane EE 314 51129 e ue Ee e 314 Del L210 PVG atmdese SIND EE 314 5 11 11 pvc CNCApSUIANO Nice ec 315 5 11 12 uplink gigabit 2 02c2 s sete teeaedsentstedsecteteheentsSatencdedetpeanybeleesdedeteeetybehphiste 315 5 12 Access List Mode Commands ccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 316 E KEE 316 5 12 perati Sbarsa Pe T TRE NORE ERE EE 316 en KE ro G eae ne Oe eae RE TRE OOaR ee Br GOMER RE TUR T Marin Sear non A tone Cone 316 5124 COSHIAG ASE E 317 Dake OS MD EE 317 EE Eege indie a a eelere eer 318 512 7 CINGNY DC atten teac ete Ala ha Eeeg 318 KEE e TEE 319 5129 1p alOWO xt scenes oeerveetieeree ei a a on aE 319 5 12 10 ip allowed list EE 320 GC K elle e EE 320 5 1242 IPPFOLOCOL EE 322 TS IASI BOM cscsaeed inns EE eg 322 5 12 14 l4dstp rt E 323 12 15 MICH FALE TEE 323 TEE EE lee 323 Dele VE SICID EE 323 EE 324 De bi ET EE 325 5 1220 Eu Le EE 325 5 13 ATM Description Mode CommandS cccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 326 Lol FS ed S GRP ee ideen 326 5132 RE ne EE 326 SASS UN E 327 EE 327 Eeer E 328 DASO VDI EE 328 Eegeregie ege 329 et WO E 330 EN 26 Ho 62 le Raga neem ere eae ea a nee eet ae ae OO A eRe nee REE 331 SES MOCO AD E bens Eegeregie 331 Defoe EE 332 lS Bae DIMM EE 333 5 14 Priority List Mode Command ccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 334 EE E RE
141. descriptor click on the radio button beside the row number to select the traffic descriptor and then click on the Delete button Note that the default profile cannot be deleted 167 4 6 SNMP 4 6 1 SNMP Community This option allows you to configure the SNMP community that is the group that IDL 2402s and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group and serve as form of authentication From the SNMP menu click on SNMP Community The following page is displayed SNMP Community SNMP Community Setup Label Description New Click on this button to create a new SNMP community After you click on New the following page is displayed Type in the name of the SNMP community up to 63 characters note that community names beginning with a digital number are not allowed and select the access mode Read only or Read Write Then click on Apply button SNMP Community Next No 12 Apply Back Snmp Community Name SnmpCommunityName2 Access Model Readonly Access Mode Select the SNMP community access mode Read only or Read Write Modify Click on this button to modify the community name Delete Select an index and then click on this button to delete a community 168 4 6 2 SNMP Target This option allows you to configure the SNMP target to control where the SNMP traps n
142. dex and type in BRAS MAC address and then click on Modify button To delete a MAC Select a checkbox checkboxes beside the index and then click on Delete button IPoA BRAS MAC Page 1 of 4 7 Delete Modify D 3 138 4 3 7 2 Interface Setup This option allows you to setup the interface for IPoA IPoE IWF From the Bridge menu click on POA and then nterface Setup The following page is displayed Click on the radio button to select a circuit set values for the parameters and then click on Modify button IPoA Interface Setup Port O1 12 D ver D vaf A8 maxmac 4 cvof 1001 cvprt Pri 0 T Trattic Rx Detautt UnShaped D Tx Detautt UnShaped D Bras Macldx 1 D Uplink Giga sl Encap LLC T Status Disable D Modify Query IPoA Interface Setup Label Description Port O1 12 D Click on the drop down list and select the line ports to be listed VPI Type in the VPI Value range is 0 255 VCI Type in the VCI Value range is 21 32 65535 MaxMAC Type in the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the bridge port for GBE interface 1 4096 for DSL interface 1 128 Type in the VID value of C Tag the innermost VLAN tag as defined in CVID IEEE 802 1ad and having an EtherType value of 0x8100 The C VID indicates the access loop CVPRI Click on the drop down list and select the VLAN priority level of C Tag Pri O 7 139 Cl
143. dex gt alarm_interval Description Set RMON alarm interval Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt alarm_interval lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Alarm interval Valid values 0 2147483647 0 disable 265 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 76 rmon alarm lt index gt delete Description Delete RMON alarm entry Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt delete lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 77 rmon alarm lt index gt falling_eventindex Description Set RMON alarm falling event index Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt falling_eventindex lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt RMON alarm falling event index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 78 rmon alarm lt index gt falling_threshold Description Set RMON alarm falling threshold Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt falling_ threshold lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 266 lt number gt RMON alarm falling threshold Valid values 0 4294967
144. disable enable DHCP relay function ID Select Click on this drop down list and select the Relay Agent Information that is inserted to the forwarding packets Options are Circuit ID Remote ID or Both Circuit ID Type Click on this drop down list and select the type of Circuit ID Options are DEFAULT CUSTOMER DEFAULT means our system defined default type lt DSLAM name gt lt circuit number gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt CUSTOMER means the customer defined type Remote ID Type Click on this drop down list and select the format of Remote ID Options are DEFAULT Line ID ADSL line identifier Line Desc description for the line Line Phone phone number CUSTOMER DEFAULT means our system default format which is DSLAM name port_id bridge_id CUSTOMER means the customer defined format customer can type in any word not exceeding 48 characters For Line ID the format is port_id bridge_id Port Identifier For Line Desc the format is port_id bridge_id Port Description For Line Phone the format is port_id bridge_id Port Phone Number The Port Identifier Description and Phone Number are set in the ADSL line information table refer to section 4 4 3 Set Once you have changed the setting of any one of the parameters DHCP Mode ID Select CKT Type Remote Type DLSAM Name Service Name remember to click on Set to submit the modification DSL Line ID Configuration Port 01 12 D pvc 1 D Click o
145. dows you can run terminal emulator such as PuTTY Authorization Level Level Description Super User Superuser can run all commands Engineer Engineer can run all commands except the commands for creating modifying deleting account and displaying running configuration Guest Guest can run most commands except the commands that have default creating modifying deleting purpose 206 Screen Description this is motd file to inform any information to user System Information System HW FW SW version Conpiled Tue Jun 16 20 43 55 CST 2008 local gt enable local EEEEEEEKEEEEEEEEN Enable Mode Help EEKEKEEEEEKEEEEEEEN Disable mode Return to Enable node Exit current mode Global Command and Description Help command List command System commands g Le Ping Show commands General Command and Description Losin to ip address Screen Description 207 Execution Modes The CLI contains several execution modes Users will see different set of commands under different execution modes Table 5 1 lists all the execution modes and their purposes When users enter a certain execution mode the corresponding mode prompt will be displayed automatically on the screen The mode prompts of all the execution modes are also listed in Table 5 1 5 1 List of Execution Modes Execute mode Description Prompt symbol Initialize Without login prompt or already gt a
146. e Mandatory 338 5 14 8 ethertype list Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 9 ipprotocol Description Syntax Parameter Show Ether Type priority list ethertype list None Specify IP protocol of packets to remark vian priority Show IP protocol priority list entry Disable IP protocol priority list entry ipprotocol lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt protocol lt protocol gt ipprotocol lt number gt list ipprotocol lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt ToS IP Precedence priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory protocol Input protocol name Valid values 339 icmp ICMP Internet Control Message lt 1 gt igmp IGMP Internet Group Management lt 2 gt ipinip IP in IP encapsulation lt 4 gt tcp TCP Transmission Control lt 6 gt grp GRP Globin Reduction Protocol lt gt igp IGP Any private interior gateway lt 9 gt udp UDP User Datagram lt 17 gt gre GRE General Routing Encapsulation lt 47 gt eigrp EIGR
147. e Valid value 1 10 CLI session will be closed once the idle time exceeds this timeout value SE Valid value 180 3600 sec Click on this button to set default values CLI session 5 CLI timeout 300 Default sec Modify Click on this button to submit the modification 67 4 1 6 Cluster Setup This option allows you to setup Cluster function which can make a group of NEs network elements work together as a single NE from the management point of view Before you group a Master and a Slave IPDSLAM some parameters need to be well configured 1 2 3 Cluster domain name The group name for a cluster must be the same on Master and Slave Cluster IP address IP address to be used for remote management when Master and Slave are grouped together NE cluster name A name to identify Master or Slave Set private IP address on in band port for both Master and Slave IPDSLAM The private IP is used for communication between Master and Slave The management center actually uses Cluster IP address for remote management Master and Slave need to be configured with same management VLAN The default gateway should be configured to the router that is aware how to route management traffic to Management Center of the management network The setting of Cluster default gateway should be the same between Master and Slave Currently a IDL 2402 cluster can support up to four cluster members NEs The IPDSLAMs ina cl
148. e 1 default cannot be modified or deleted Name Type in the name of the profile 141 Rate Mode Downstream Click on the drop down list and select the Downstream Rate Adaptive Mode Valid options are Manual Rate changed manually Init Rate automatically selected at start up only and does not change after that Dynamic Rate automatically selected at initialization and is continuously adapted during operation show time Rate Mode Upstream Click on the drop down list and select the Upstream Rate Adaptive Mode Valid options are Manual Rate changed manually Init Rate automatically selected at start up only and does not change after that Dynamic Rate automatically selected at initialization and is continuously adapted during operation show time 142 4 4 1 2 Service Channel Profile This option allows you to configure the ADSL service channel profile From the ADSL menu click on Profile and then Service Profile Channel The following page is displayed ADSL Service Channel Profile Select Index jan ki EN Reg The First Index is default profile can t modify amp delete To modify a service channel profile please create service main profile first BitRate DownShiFt Upshift te E kbit s 0 65535 Noise Min Noise Min Ge Se Interval Margin Interval index L Direction oS ia Ese zg VS een NEES EES KSE ees BEE BEE SEET A
149. e added to all the upstream frames received on this port and the C Tags will be the original tags of these frames no C Tag for untagged incoming frames On the other hand the S tag will be removed from all the downstream outgoing frames Note When an untagged frame enters the IDL 2402 it is assigned the default PVID of the ingress incoming bridge port and become a single tagged frame no matter VLAN stacking is enabled or not Set Ingress ON check if the VID of the incoming frame is in the member set If not in the member set block the frame Ingress Set Ingress OFF Ingress filter disabled Click on the drop down list and select to accept ALL Frame only VLAN tagged AccFrm frame or only Untagged frame ON OFF to enable disable isolation When port isolation is enabled packets isolation received from a line bridge port including trunk interface configured as user link cannot be forwarded to any other line bridge port even for broadcasting Priority Force Click on the drop down list and select the priority forcing mode Options are Disabled Reserve the original priority of all packets Ingress Force applying the default VLAN priority value to all the packets received on this bridge port so this rule will work on all the member set of this bridge port Egress Force the priority value of all packets sent out from this bridge port s default VLAN to be the default VLAN priority so this rule only work
150. e int for Interval s 15Minute TCA and the day for Day s TCA The NE for Near_End and the FE for Far_End E Disabled o do go doo doo fo doo f o fnaf o fo po doo ddo go o fo f o fo o fo naf o GET we 9 WO WO BO WO WO ee ee ee RA ee GT ET we EE 9 es WO ee ee 9 RW ee ee ee ee ee RCM ee ADSL TCA Threshold setup Label Description SE of 16 7 Click on this drop down list to select the page to be displayed e Once you have typed in new threshold values click on this button to submit the Modify a modification Delete Click on this button to delete a selected profile or profiles Select Click on the checkbox to select the profile you want to modify or delete To issue TCA when the PM statistics exceed thresholds this profile must be Enable enabled int day ESs NE FE Interval Day Errored Seconds near end far end int day SESs NE FE Interval Day Severely Errored Seconds near end far end int day UASs NE FE Interval Day Unavailable Seconds near end far end int LOS NE FE Interval Loss of Signal near end far end int LOF NE FE Interval Loss of Frame near end far end int LOPWR FE Interval Loss of Power far end 151 int LOL NE Interval Loss of Link near end int ErrFrm NE FE Interval Error Frame near end far end 152 4 4 2 Data amp Inventory 4 4 2 1 Inventory This option allows you t
151. e x 2 1 3 Application The PLANET IDL 2402 offers the benefit of high performance to central office co location and MTU Multi Tenant Unit MDU Multi Dwelling Unit markets It provides broadband data service over existing copper wires without affecting the conventional voice service by 24 subscriber ports with built in POTS splitter A PLANET IP DSLAM is the perfect solution for NSP a cost effective but high value centrally management capability Application 1 For Community NSP Central Office w IDL 2402 w GE Application 2 For Building Building IDL 2402 Telephone wire 00Base TX UTP ft ADSI 2 2 E Telco 50 Cable zm 10008aseT UTP B E cy ADE 3400 PC 1 4 Outlook 1 4 1 Front Panel The front panels of IDL 2402 are shown below Ee PLANET wilt 0 i S Heck o em et nn 7 ei m 999099090090009 tia W DOE 4i daf Ach 2097 C 24 Port DSLAM Switch IDL 2402 LED Definition LED LED Description Normal Operation a Self test fail Normal Operation To indicate the system alarm status ADSL Port is activated and linked DSL status ADSL Port is Disabled ADSL Port is activated but not linked Uplink Port connect with 100 1000Mbps Ethernet link Uplink Port connect with 10Mbps Ethernet link Active Inactive Uplink Port Transmit receive data ALM Port Definition Port Port Description
152. ection of the panel to the DSLAM Remove the Air Filter Panel 3 Pull the air filter out of the DSLAM 4 Wash and clean the dust that on the Air Filter 5 Slide the cleaned Air Filter into the Air Filter slot of the DSLAM 6 Reinstall the Air Filter Panel 370 Appendix D Introduction for Troubleshooting This chapter describes instructions for the IDL 2402 system problems These procedures may require the presence of technicians at remote IDL 2402 system sites and plus an operator at PC to monitor system alarms by console during maintenance Resolving Problems Indicated Through LEDs This section describes what to do to solve problems indicated by LEDs on the system front panel Problems Indicated by LEDs LED Activity Problem Action SYS Not lit even though There is a power up Troubleshoot the DSLAM for power DSLAM is powered problem with the up problems see troubleshooting up system section Red Self test failed There is Replace the DSLAM a functional problem with the system ALM Red Major alarm set See troubleshooting section Red Flash Major and Minor alarm See troubleshooting section set Yellow Minor alarm set See troubleshooting section Resolving Problems Indicated Through Alarms Alarms of the system are viewed through CLI and Web GUI If an alarm indicates a problem please refer to troubleshooting procedures section Troubleshooting Procedures for the IDL 2402 When
153. eeeeeeeeeee cette eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 268 5 4 85 rmon event lt index gt Communfty EE 269 5 4 86 rmon event lt index gt delete EEN 270 5 4 87 rmon event lt index gt description 270 5 4 88 rmon event lt index gt owner eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 271 5 4 89 rmon event lt index gt type ccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeteeees 271 5 4 90 rmon history lt index gt buckets_requested eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 271 5 4 91 rmon history lt index gt delete A 272 5 4 92 rmon history lt index gt He 272 5 4 93 rmon history lt index gt mier 272 5 4 94 rmon history lt iNdex gt owner eececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 273 5 4 95 rmon statistic lt index gt delete een 273 5 4 96 rmon statistic lt index gt EE 274 5 4 97 rmon statistic lt index gt OWNER EEN 274 D498 TOULG EE 274 5 4 99 route EE Seeerei Aeeedeeke Ce Aere Greet eer e Sie ee ee 275 5 4 100 route EE 275 5 4 101 runningcfg active en e 275 5 4 102 runningcfg load partition EN 276 5 4 103 runningcfg E ee DEE 276 5 4 104 runningcfg write Partition 2 2 0 cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 276 5 4 105 snmp lt index gt community 20 0 eeceeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 276 241 OG SIMO Bn Le EE 277 5 4 107 snmp target lt name gt address en 277 5 4 108 snmp target lt name gt delete ee 278 5 4 109 snmp target lt name gt tag liSt ee 278 5 4 110 s
154. eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 245 5 3 120 show vian translation mam Jo one sssesssssenerresessersrrrrnnneseerrnne 245 E TST TCIM E 245 Did lee e 245 5 4 Configure Mode CommandsS ccccccsseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 246 5A ACCOSSIGE eege 246 54 SEENEN 246 5 4 3 la RE 247 5 4 4 account MOONY Lee 247 EEN EE SE 248 5 46 alarm Event Clear ege 248 5 4 7 alarm history legt eeeeegesgeeEEEECEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEE Eege 248 HE EE eiin iia aa aina eer 248 5 4 9 atm loopback deeugegddegedtegeeteegCg deeg dee tend Sete nendedninctial 248 EE e Ee e DEE 249 5 4 11 cli config IMC EE 249 BAA cl sterefg elen DEE EE 249 5 4 13 cluster cfg DIEU 250 5 4 14 cluster cfg NaMe EE 250 5 4 15 cluster cfg De 250 5 4 16 cluster cfg voting key gedet EES ee 251 R a Ao LON e D E Signet hates A eases eevee ees cna ua vekes eetaeet agrees eee 251 5 4 18 GOtlX CISA Ci 4 252 ccccepechesenpectesccpeetesenpendyesesiedeneepeebeneegeststexpeebeeeepecss 251 5 4 19 dot1x enable eege eege eege 251 5 4 20 dsl line identify ANC AEN 251 5 4 21 dsl line identify dhcp option82 circuit ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 251 5 4 22 dsl line identify dhcp option82 delam name 252 5 4 23 dsl line identify dhcp option82 delam name custer nnnnnnn111111n 252 5 4 24 dsl line identify dhcp option82 delam name cusiomer 252 5 4 25 dsl line identify dhcp option82 eub 252 5 4 26 dsl line identify dhcp opti
155. elect the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 113 VLAN Priority Regeneration eca z acar D NextNo 3 Priority in O_ Priority out gt Create VLAN Priority Re Generation PRI Remark DYLAN Priority Regen D No From 1 To No range from 1 to 1024 Query Delete GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup VLAN Priority Regeneration Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this Que S button to retrieve Delete To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA orca D cicat D bridge port Priority In Click on the drop down list and select the incoming VLAN Priority 0 7 Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 114 Differentiated Services oa Di orca Di Next No 3 VLAN DSCP Priority Remark PRI Remark 8 DiffServe z No From No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Incoming psf 00 DEF AULT X Pr
156. equested value 271 Valid values 1 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 91 rmon history lt index gt delete Description Delete RMON history entry Syntax rmon history lt index gt delete Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 92 rmon history lt index gt ifc Description Set Physical interface Syntax rmon history lt index gt ifc lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Physical interface index Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 93 rmon history lt index gt interval Description Set RMON history interval Syntax rmon history lt index gt interval lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value 272 Type Mandatory lt number gt History interval Valid values 1 3600 sec Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 94 rmon history lt index gt owner Description Set RMON history owner Syntax rmon history lt index gt owner lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt string
157. er TCA Profile The parameters include ESs SESs UASs for interval and day PM and LOS LOF LOPWR LOL Error Frame for interval PM only The system provides up to 120 Service profiles and Spectrum profiles respectively and provides up to 16 TCA profiles One of the profiles is a fix default that cannot be modified users are allowed to create and edit the other profiles Each profile contains a parameter set for downstream and upstream direction respectively Users can also observe the actual values of these parameters through CLI Web GUI or EMS The ADSL configuration also includes the function for user to query the line status the physical layer status and the channel interface status for ATU C and ATU R The status information includes the attenuation rate actual net data rate the line attenuation SNR margin transmission power actual interleaving delay channel characteristics per subcarrier quiet line noise PSD etc 49 3 3 Performance management Performance management supports performance monitoring by collecting and thresholding performance parameter counters against 15 miniute intervals for each interface and module respectively Users can query the data of these parameters through CLI and Web GUI Performance statistics include the following 1 Statistics for current interval A real time aspect contains the reflection of the current value situation before the new interval The current value includes v
158. ervice setting screen select the ADSL port and Admin is ON Click Modify to make this Port is ON System gt gt ADSL Port Service Cluster Main Unit Y Admin ON M Service Profile 1 Spectrum Profile 1 ra page 1 an C Moaity i Fi range from 1 to 120 The Spectrum Profile range from 1 to 120 The TCA Profile range from 1 to 64 Port o1m12 Select Port San Statue ie Profile Pab 1 er OFF m 4 a G 2 OFF OFF 1 1 1 O 3 OFF OFF 1 1 1 O 4 OFF OFF 1 1 1 O 5 OFF OFF 1 1 1 a s 8 OFF OFF 1 1 1 e 7 OFF OFF 1 1 1 O 8 OFF OFF 1 1 1 e 3 OFF OFF 1 1 1 e Ier 10 OFF OFF 1 1 1 e 1 OFF OFF 1 1 1 You can see the Admin status became to ON System gt gt ADSL Port Service eee Port Service Cluster Main Unit Y aamin ON Y Service Profile 1 Spectrum Profile 1 TCA Profile 1 Laut The Service Profile range from 1 to 120 The Spectrum Profile range from 1 to 120 The TCA Profile range from 1 to 64 EIER set cot Bi Si SS Sr JS EE 2 OFF OFF 1 1 1 3 OFF OFF 1 1 1 O 4 OFF OFF 1 1 1 Le 5 OFF OFF 1 1 1 r O 6 OFF OFF 1 1 1 O 7 OFF OFF 1 1 1 e 8 OFF OFF 1 1 1 oO 3 OFF OFF 1 1 1 n ert 10 OFF OFF 1 1 1 O 4 OFF OFF 1 1 1 30 Step 5 Connect the ADSL2 2 CPE to Patch Panel Connec
159. es please don t turn off or reset the system 2 0nce the system has upgraded already please restart it Firmware Update Label Description Once you have typed in the parameter values click on this button to start Firmware Update firmware update Remote FTP Server IP Type in the IP address of the FTP server Server User Name Type in the ftp user name Server Password Type in the ftp password File Name Type in the firmware filename Firmware Update Status This field shows current status of firmware update process Select firmware memory partition Partition 1 or 2 If you change to the Zei Sillem other partition not current partition the system will restart immediately 180 This section displays the partition information including firmware version updating date and status active or not Note that active partition means the partition for next power up not current partition in use You can refer to Current Version to know which partition is the current partition in use When you update the firmware new firmware will be written to the partition that is not currently in use Partition Information FTP Get in progress The following message is displayed during getting file from FTP server incoming cluster id O FTP SERVER IP 172 16 10 219 Waiting for FTP Session about 30 sec Firmware Write in progress The Flash Write process may take a few minute
160. escription 802 1x Timeout for Supplicant Re transmissions before sending the request Syntax auth tx period lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Timeout for Supplicant Re transmissions Valid values 1 65534 Default value 60 Type Mandatory 291 5 7 9 default vlan Description Set default VLAN ID for a bridge port Syntax default vlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value 1 Type Mandatory 5 7 10 default prio Description Set default priority value for a bridge port Syntax default prio lt prio ID gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 7 11 dhcp relay Description Enable disable DHCP relay or Set circuit ID remote ID for identifying the subscriber Syntax dhcp relay trusted untrusted circuit lt circuit ID gt remote lt remote ID gt Parameter Name Description lt circuit ID gt Circuit ID Valid values string type max length 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt remote ID Remote ID Valid values string type max length 48 Default value Type Mandatory 292 5 7 12 egress Description Default PVID egress taged untagged setting Syntax egress tag untag Parameter None 5 7 13 force priority Description Force priority set
161. escription Enable Disable MAC spoofing detection log mac spoofing detect log enable disable Syntax Parameter None 5 4 52 management gbe Description Set GBE port IP address management gbe lt ipv4 adderss gt Syntax Parameter Name Description ipv4 address IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory xxx 0 255 5 4 53 management gbe vian Description Set incoming VLAN tag management only allowing incoming packets with the specified VLAN ID or no limit of VLAN ID management gbe vlan lt VLAN ID gt no limit lt VLAN ID gt Syntax Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 259 5 4 54 management gbe vlan priority Description Set priority level of the inband management traffic sent out from GBE port Syntax management gbe vlan priority lt prio ID gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 4 55 pm clear Description Clear current performance monitoring data Syntax pm clear lt port gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 56 port template mask Description Mask the function profile of template line port Mask means to select this item to be co
162. eseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenees 50 3 3 1 RMON Features EE 52 3 4 Fault Management ivi icicccdescsccedecodccedecesesstaredeeedessencndaseusaedesndessduascnnedecedesedeesanas 54 3 5 LOOPBACK Testing EE 56 3 6 Cluster TE 57 A WEB Ee CMe nt eenean aaeeea narea ana aa aeaaea anaana aapa 58 WEE a EEE AE lusbeusisesbavsbtenbinpblvvbeatitcabaustseabtnshsas 62 4 1 1 System Information EE 62 Sketch ee eg 63 4 1 3 Ethernet FOE 64 4 1 4 ADSL Port Service Ae 65 Re Be EE 67 4z 6 Cluster ET EE 68 4 1 7 System Inventory exces EEN 71 4 1 8 System Contact Info 72 4 DSN TE EEN 73 AA AG MP el E 74 AAS eet AGMIMISUATION eegene 75 A ADIB o OE O a EEE EA E A O E AEE E A E EA 77 4 2 802 1x Se U y aar areara aaa areae r pana ara rare saraaa rE Paaa panana Esa SaN E Aan Aani ANEA ariaa 78 AO System Protocol EE 78 4 2 2 RADIUS amp Local Profile sssseseesssnnnnneeeeseesrerrnnrnnsseerrrnnnnnnnnseerrrnrnnnneeeeet 82 Aid BOGE E E 84 4 3 1 lee 84 4 3 2 VLAN Configuration EE 92 ie EE 100 4 3 4 Forwarding EE 127 EE 129 GR EI 131 4ST POA EE 138 BA ADSL A A A eNe e 141 E al Profle e RE E REE EEE EEE EEEE ELE EEEE EAE EEEE E 141 4 4 2 Data amp INVENTON EE 153 4 43 line Config amp NfO nenna EN E ATA 162 45 TRANG E 165 4 5 1 ATM WK ue TE 165 ALG ONE ctearbuduinaitetnwaidetbiactlaphtasbiuabtealbavbiusiterbtuldiaabtatlinaltedtarhtut T 168 461 SNMP COMMUNITY EE 168 4 6 2 SNMP E EE 169 4 6 3 SNMP NOUIY sist eeetiergeet redg
163. eter Name Description lt string gt Profile name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 354 5 19 Spectrum Profile Configure Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Spectrum Profile execution mode 5 19 1 aggregate Description Set downstream upstream aggregate power level Syntax aggregate ds us max powerlevel lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Power level tenth dBm Valid values 0 25 5 step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 2 bands lt index gt start stop Description Set RF bands Syntax bands lt index gt start stop lt value gt Parameter Name Description index Bands array index Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory value Set start stop frequency KHz Valid values 0 12000 Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 3 bands lt index gt mask Description Set bands mask Syntax bands lt index gt mask lt value gt 355 Parameter 5 19 4 carriermask Description Syntax Parameter Name Description index Bands array index Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory value Valid values see the following egress mo Control egress no control egress_notched egress notched ingress_low ingress low ingress_weak ingress weak ingress_strong ingress strong rf_signal_am RF Signal AM Type rf_si
164. eter Name Description number Share DLB profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt Cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt First Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory lt eir gt Excess Info Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Second Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory 351 5 18 Service Profile Configure Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Service Profile execution mode 5 18 1 bitrate Description Set downstream upstream Minimum Maximum Planned L2 minimum bit rate Syntax bitrate ds us min max planned 12 lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Bit rate kb s Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 5 18 2 delay Description Set downstream upstream delay introduced by the interleaving Syntax delay ds us lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Delay time ms Valid values 1 63 Default value Type Mandatory 5 18 3 2 packet Description Set L2 Packet cell Syntax l2 packet lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Set L2 Packet cell Valid values 0 28 Default value Type Mandatory
165. etetebe eebe eege 171 47 ENEE 172 E Re 172 RE 173 4 7 3 Firmware Update e 180 ATA ATM Neel ee 183 4 7 5 Fault dE Ee Ment vas ecccenedccitierdase dec ucc ced tence icaes aud tendseiteuddged edd eicten ies 184 4 7 6 Performance MoOniOrinG ca2ccnanandinaWwenaincsauaniuseiwae 189 5 CLI Command Reference ccccccccsessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseneseeeneeeeeeeeessneees 206 5 1 Global Commands ssisiscccsiiiciiinascsadinccisadencndnasiacacstdanneuad nandaadescedsaviaaaunadesccdaaten 212 Dele l EE 212 e Mc MOMS tsa tase tan erie ic te nhc talc cc ht tani td attic td atta ta 212 Eeer 212 een Be Ee 212 1B OMG REN 212 EE 212 Ds PANG SEET 213 MR Ua ca a a ee a a ac he ae Cr Lee nee 213 9 Kolist OD MOOG E 213 5 1 10 System COMAC EE 213 5 1 11 system location EE 213 Ds E KEE E 214 5 1 13 system restart GE 214 5 2 Initialize Mode CommandS sssssnnnneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 215 La ae EE e 215 5 2 2 Show license ebe eebe eebe 215 Die SHOW TING EE 215 5 2 4 Show UND TIN EE 215 EE ara asra Naira dar Naira dar Nasa dar Nadra der 215 5 3 Enable Mode Commands ccccccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseneeseeneeeeeeeees 216 E Re TEE 216 Di 12 DING ee 216 5 3 3 Show access list berate EEN 216 5 3 4 show access list ASTID een 216 td SNOW ACCES TE OSH E 217 5 3 6 show access list ethertypPe Abbe 217 5 3 7 show access list mp alowed 217 5 3 8 show access list ipprotocol
166. fect CTRL u Kill backward from the cursor to the beginning of the current line CTRL w Kill the word behind point using white space as a word boundary The killed text is saved on the kill ring CTRL y Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at point CTRL s Terminal will not response to what the operator key in CTRL q Back to normal mode from terminal not responding mode CTRL z Exit current execution mode 210 Notation Conventions The notation conventions for the parameter syntax of each CLI command are as follows Parameters enclosed in are optional Parameter values are separated by a vertical bar only when one of the specified values can be used Parameter values are enclosed in when you must use one of the values specified About String type Parameters Some commands have string type parameters When you type in the values of these parameters you must be careful not to use the keyword that is actually a part of some command For example account add default will cause a syntax mistake since default is the keyword of the command igmp default and some other commands Therefore it is recommended to add when you have to use the command keyword as the parameter value In this way the keyword will be regarded as a common string For example account add default 211 5 1 Global Commands The Global commands can be used in all execution modes 5 1 1 bye
167. fig Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download Then click on Get File button Database Configuration DB Contig Select B Import File Load Remote Config to Running Config Pe TFTP Server p 172 16 10 241 File Name Oonfigl Get File Load to Running Config successfully Database Configuration DB Config Select B lmport File Load Remote Config to Running Contig D TFTP Server p 72 16 10 241 File Maele Get File Fail to Get File Database Configuration DB Config Select B lmport File Load Remote Contig to Running Contig x TFTP Server p 17216 1028 File Name foonfigl Get File 36 C Export File Put Running Config to Remote TFTP Server Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to export Then click on Put File button Database Configuration DB Config Select C Export File Put Running Config To Remote TFTP Server D TFTP Server pp 172 16 10 241 File Name Config Put File TFTP put file successfully Database Configuration DB Contig Select C Export File Put Running Config To Remote TFTP Server D TFTP Server pp 172 16 10 241 File Name Config Put File TFTP put file fail Database Configuration DB Config Select C Export File Put Running Contig To Remote TFTP Server D TFTP Server ip 72 16 10 28 File Maele Put File 37 D Save Running Config to Flash System Config Click on t
168. file Configure Mode COMMANGG sccsseseeneseeseereeneeees 355 14 5 19 E ele let 355 5 19 2 bands lt index gt start SlOD bs eens acai ecient ae a es 355 5 19 3 bands lt index gt EE 355 5 19 4 carriermask ses ieegetCggsegeEgeeegehC eege Eege deegehEREgegeE Eege 356 5 19 5 MESSAGC DASEO EE 357 5 19 6 modem features EE 357 519 7 NOISGINal LU EE 357 EEN 357 519 9 PDOMOGS EE 358 5 19 10 DEE KO Elle 358 5 19 11 power mgt 2 enable 358 5 19 12 power mgt 12_13 enable RRE 358 B19 13 pow r mgt RE EE 358 5 19 14 power mot l2 time EE 359 5 19 15 power mogt l2 atpr EEN 359 5 19 16 power mogt l2 atprt eeeeeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeneneesnseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneas 359 GE aber TE 360 EE eege ee 360 5 19 19 rxaggregate us max powerlevel ssssssssesssssnrnrrtnsssrrrrrrnnnnneseerenne 360 5 19 20spectrum name Aust thant ib ctce eS BA h tlh theta sbsbats huts sbshatsaales 361 5 19 21 status modify complete EE 361 5 20 TCA Profile Mode Commainds sccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 362 520 1 adshtea EE 362 5 20 2 adsl tca Ee 362 5 20 39 adsl tea ne EN 362 E EE tele EE 362 5 21 Dotlx Mode Command wvvsiieeseicciiccscnsisecianeceeinnnennsnisaeeiceniennnewnonen 363 EE ENEE ue DEE 363 Die ee server MUTI IPD EE 363 5 21 3 server lt number gt auth port ugeet eege Ee 364 5 21 4 server lt number gt acct port EEN 364 5 21 5 server lt number gt max fail EEN 36
169. g to all the incoming frames through this port Note When an untagged frame enters the IDL 2402 it is assigned the default PVID of the ingress incoming bridge port and become a single tagged frame no matter VLAN stacking is enabled or not Set Ingress ON check if the VID of the incoming frame is in the member set If Ingress not in the member set block the frame Set Ingress OFF Ingress filter disabled Acc Frm Click on the drop down list and select to accept ALL Frame only VLAN tagged frame or only Untagged frame 84 ON OFF to enable disable isolation When port isolation is enabled packets Isol received from a trunk port when both the trunk interfaces are configured as up link cannot be forwarded to the other trunk port even for broadcasting To modify the configuration of a giga port 1 Click on the radio button to select trunk port 1 Modify 2 Change the parameter values 3 Click on Modify button to apply new values Query Click on this button to query current status 85 4 3 1 2 ADSL PVC This option allows you to setup the ADSL PVC From the Bridge menu click on nterface Setup and then ADSL PVC The following page is displayed ADSL PYC Setup ver vaf 8 tratticsrx Default UnShaped tx Default UnShaped x Encap LLC protocol Base LAN Disabled zl ALT Modify Delete vcs GK SIE SEE SE WK KK E WE E ATM TRAFFIC PARAMETER You shall c
170. gnal_ hamband RF Signal HAMBAND Type Default value egress no Control Type Mandatory Set carrier mask carriermask ds us lt index gt lt value gt Name Description index Carrier mask array index Valid values 0 63 Default value Type Mandatory lt value gt Carrier mask array value Valid values 0x00 Oxff Hex Default value Type Mandatory 356 5 19 5 message based Description Set minimum DS US message based data rate that is needed by ATU Syntax message based ds us min lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Min downstream upstream message based data rate Valid values 4 28 kbps Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 6 modem features Description Set modem features enable disable Syntax modem features enable disable Parameter None 5 19 7 noisemargin Description Set downstream upstream maximum minimum target noise margin Syntax noisemargin ds us max min target lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Noise margin value Valid values 0 31 or 51 1 means no max noise margin is used step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 8 opmode Description Set Operational mode Syntax opmode set clear lt opmode id gt Parameter Name Description opmode id The ID of allowed ADSL modes of operation Valid values Use list op mode
171. gt button To modify or delete a VLAN select the checkboxes of the entries you want to modify or delete and then click on Modify or Delete button Static WLAN COHFIG VLAN SHOW VLAN feos Mier oo RE Port Default VID VLAN ID List ADSL Pot PwC 1 58 Modify Delete Added VID Vian Tag Isolation Priority E 5 Tagged x on D Reserved D C 8 Tagged D OFF x Reserved D Create gt Tagged D ON e Reserved Di GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE SHOW VLAN In the following page type in the VID and then click on Query All the bridge ports belonging to the VLAN and the configuration data of these ports will be displayed in the table Static WLAN CONFIG VLAN SHOW VLAN GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE 93 4 3 2 2 Protocol Base VLAN This option allows you to configure the protocol based VLAN table From the Bridge menu click on VLAN Configuration and then Protocol Base VLAN The following page is displayed Select the checkboxes of the entries you want to create or delete To create a new entry type in the VLAN ID and select the EtherType protocol If you select Other for EtherType type the EtherType value in the rightmost field Protocol Base VLAN fja Pagel of 4 D Create Delete Query PPPoE Discovery Stage v PPPoE Session Stage STATIC VLAN 4 3 2 3 Translation VLAN This option allows you to configure the translation VLAN table which defines some special VLAN working rules such a
172. he drop down list and select partition and then click on Write_Running button to write running configuration to Flash Database Configuration DB Contig Select D Save Running Config to Flash System Config D fte flash al Partition v Wirte_Running Write running config to Flash successfully Database Configuration DB Contig Select D Save Running Config to Flash System Config be te flash al Partition zl Wirte_Running 38 E Reload Flash to Running Config Click on the drop down list and select partition and then click on LOAD_FLASH button to load configuration from Flash to Running Config Database Configuration DB Contig Select E Reload FLASH System Config to Running Contig e Load flash at Partition LOAD_FLASH Load configuration from Flash to Running Config successfully Database Configuration DB Contig Select E Reload FLASH System Config to Running Config be Load flash at Partition LOAD_FLASH 39 F Restore Factory Default Click on Factory_Default button to restore factory default configuration Database Configuration DB Config Select F Restore Factory Default D Factory Default After loading default configuration to Flash successfully you must click on RESTART button to restart the system so that the configuration can take effect Database Configuration DB Config Select F Restore Factory Default D Factory Default
173. i 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Dishale 2 6 7 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Dishale 8 1 UnTagged pri O No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale e 9 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale e 10 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale e 11 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale e A DSL PwC CONFIGURATION STATIC VLAN You shall click on the drop down lists to select port range and PVC first Then the data of these PVCs bridge ports you selected will be displayed Click on the radio button to select the bridge port you want to modify ADSL Bridge Setup Label Description VID Type in the default port VLAN ID Valid value is 1 4094 VLAN setting for the egress traffic Includes three drop down lists VLAN UnTagged Tagged select untagging tagging the outgoing frames downstream direction for line bridge port If UnTagged is selected a double tagged packet will leave single tagged the outer most VLAN tag is 88 removed and a single tagged packet will leave untagged Pri 0 7 set the default VLAN priority level no Stack Stack TLS disable N 1 VLAN stacking enable N 1 VLAN stacking our system adds the default VLAN tag to all the incoming frames through this port enable TLS transparent LAN service so that this bridge port becomes VLAN transparent refer to DSL Forum TR 101 A pre configured S Tag is used to encapsulate TLS traffic going through this port That is an S Tag PVID here will b
174. ial Sequential number Time Event occurring date and time 186 4 7 5 2 Alarm Profile This option allows you to view and update the alarm profiles From the Maintenance menu click on Fault Management and then Alarm profile The Alarm Profile page is displayed Click on the Select Page drop down list and select a page to display To modify an alarm profile click on the radio button beside the alarm ID select the Level Major Minor Mask Unmask and then click on the Modify button You can also select the ALL D checkbox to modify all alarm types at a time Alarm Profile Select Page Page 1 of 1 D Selected Alarm ID 104 SYS_FAN Level MINOR DI Unmask DI ALL ID IT Modify fe S 9 S S S S S 9 9 2 9 2 2 s 2 187 4 7 5 3 Hardware Temperature This page allows you to BR view current system temperature H set several temperature and time thresholds see description in the following table From the Maintenance menu click on Fault Management and then Hardware Temp The following page is displayed Temperature Threshold If current temperature e dsfdescends Up Down Shift Threshold Alarm Manager will declare that there is a highflower temperature alarm after Up Down ShiftTime seconds ALARMEVENT Temperature Configuration Label Description Modify Click on this button to submit the update once you have entered all the new threshold values Current Te
175. ick on the drop down lists and select a traffic type for transmit and Traffic Rx Tx receive direction respectively Available options are created in the ATM Traffic Descriptor page See section 4 5 1 BRAS Click on the drop down list and select a BRAS MAC Available options are created in the PoA BRAS MAC page See section 4 3 7 Uplink Click on the drop down list and select the uplink interface Encap Select AAL5 Encapsulation Type VCMUX LLC Status Enable Disable IPoA IWF Modify Click on this button to submit the modification Query Click on this button to query most recent data 140 4 4 ADSL 4 4 1 Profile 4 4 1 1 Service Main Profile This option allows you to configure the ADSL line service profile From the ADSL menu click on Profile and then Service Profile main The following page is displayed ADSL Service Profile Select Index fc yo1 10 x Modify Delete Query The First Index is default profile cant modify amp delete Rate Mode Rate Mode DownStream UpStream 3 Test 3 Dynamic D 3 Dynamic D 9 2 2 s S ADSL Line Service Profile setup Label Description Click on the drop down list and select the range of profile index Options Select Index are 0 10 11 20 111 120 This field shows the profile index Click on the radio button beside the Index profile index to select the profile you want to modify or delete Note that profil
176. idge port From the Bridge menu click on Forwarding and then Forwarding Static The following page is displayed Forwarding Static Mo From 1 No range form 1 to 512 Query Delete oica z cica D Next No 1 Source MAC foo foo foo foo foo foo VID 1 Process Pass D Create Forwarding Static Label Description Select the range of entry number in the FDB to be retrieved Valid number No From To value 1 512 Query Click on this button to display the static MAC forwarding entries Delete Delete the entries according to the entry number range you type in Loes zl eca sl Click on these drop down list to select a bridge port ADSL bridge port or oe hata GIGA bridge port where the static forwarding entries to be configured Source MAC Type in the MAC address for the static entry VID Type in the VID for the static entry 1 4094 Click on the drop down list and select Deny or Pass Pass means to forward the packets with destination MAC address Process matching one of the static forwarding MAC addresses to a specified output bridge port Deny means to drop the packets Create Click on this button to create a new entry 128 4 3 5 Relay 4 3 5 1 DSL Line Identify This option allows you to configure the DHCP option and PPPoE relay function From the Bridge menu click on Relay and then DSL Line Identify The following page is displayed DSL Li
177. ieiaislai ale 4 ml Gl Ee s sls sle s slalelelsl s vl Gl E s s s s sls s algsel rel gl gl s s s e e s als sl sl elg el gl gl 8 s se e 8 als sl s els el gl 8 s s s els s 2 s s s 2 BIBI gl g s s s ss 2 2 8 2 s 2 g al gl g s s s s s 2 2 8 g2 ales bls 5 8 s s sle s slalalels als 157 4 4 2 3 Carrier Data This option allows you to view the ADSL line carrier data From the ADSL menu click on Data amp Inventory and then Carrier Data The following page is displayed Select the line port 1 24 and carrier type LOAD or GAIN Then click on Query button Note that if the line port is still in loop testing status you cannot query the carrier data ADSL Carrier Data Port 2 zl Type Loap cain Query The LOAD formula load value 1 256 The bit LOAD distribution over Downstream passband Near END o o o o o o o m E D E m E gt Cl Gl ol Gl of ef o G G G Gf G G G G G e AA L 2 a BiG G G G G G G G G G o G G G G G G G G G GG GG bb G G G G Be Gi G G G G G G G G G G RS GG G Gf G G G G G BR G G GG G G G G G G G e G G G G G G G G G G G G o 15 15115 15 15 15 Li EET EL t kt Fh 15 15 j 15 IS 6b 1 15 15 j 15 15 Gb j 15 15 15 15 15 a 15 bb Bib Bi Bb Bib 15115 Bib bb B5 By 15 15 13 6 GG GG bho bb mh alo Gib G amp G G G G G G G 52 GG GG G G G G G G G G G G G G
178. iginal priority tag or untag enable or disable port isolation Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority lt prio ID gt reserved tag untag isolation disable Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 8 15 vian list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan list Parameter None 305 5 9 GBE LA Bridge Mode Commands 5 9 1 accfrm Description Set acceptable frame type untagged only tagged only or all Syntax accfrm all tag untag Parameter None 5 9 2 default vian Description Set default VLAN ID for a bridge port Syntax default vlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value 1 Type Mandatory 5 9 3 default prio Description Set default priority value for a bridge port Syntax default prio lt prio ID gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 9 4 egress Description Default PVID egress taged untagged setting Syntax egress tag untag Parameter None 306 5 9 5 ingress Description Syntax Parameter 5 9 6 isolation Description Syntax Parameter 5 9 7 link mode Description Syntax Parameter 5 9 8 max mac Descript
179. ing page is displayed System Log Server Modify Action Stop Y Change Server Address SYS Log Server Setup Label Description Current Server IP This field shows the IP address of current Sys Log server Type in the new IP address of Sys Log server The server must be a Change Server Address remote host To change SYS Log server address click on this button once you have Modify type in a new server IP address Click on this drop down list and select Start to start sending the Syslog Action messages to the server or Stop to stop sending the Syslog messages to the server 172 4 7 2 Database This option allows you to import export the configuration data From the Maintenance menu click on Database The following page is displayed Select the database configuration action you want to perform Database Configuration DB Contig Select Select x DB Configuration Concept Ampon File Write Download B Import File Load Remote hn TT Dee C Export File D Save Running E Reload FLASH F Restore Factory aaa G Flash Boot Point Select WEB GUI sl EEN TFTP SERVER Eee FALSH DEVICE System Contig2 Boct Point Select a A A A a can 173 A Import File Write Download Config To Flash Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download Then click on Get File butto
180. ink VLAN ID gt Gigabit uplink port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt PRIO ID gt Replaced the priority level of packets out through the uplink port with the 285 specified value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 128 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt many to one Description Set many to one VLAN translation Syntax vian translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt many to one replaced lt uplink VLAN ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt user port VLAN ID gt ADSL port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt uplink VLAN ID gt Gigabit uplink port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt PRIO ID gt Replaced the priority level of packets out through the uplink port with the specified value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 286 5 4 129 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt disable Delete the specified entry from the VLAN translation table vlan tra
181. ion Label Description Profile ID Click on this drop down list and specify the profile ID Valid value is 01 48 Click on this drop down list and select the channel index range IP CHANNEL MAP Options are Channel 001 032 Channel 033 064 Channel 225 256 Click on this checkbox to select all channels in this page at one time This is All select convenient for quick value assignment 133 Quickly IP Assign Type the IGMP group IP address here for quick assignment Click on Assign button to put the value into the table Then you can modify parts of the IP addresses directly in the table Quickly VID Assign Type the IGMP group IP address here for quick assignment Click on Assign button to put the value into the table Assign Click on this button to apply the parameter values you have just entered But these values haven t been really saved in the database You must click on Create to save the values Once the setting has been saved you cannot modify the values You must delete the channel and then create again Select Click on this checkbox to select the channel you want to create delete or assign values IP Address You can type the IGMP group address here and then click on Create button to save Valid values 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 The range of addresses from 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 is reserved for the use of routing protocols and other low level topology discove
182. ion Syntax Parameter 5 9 9 priority regen Enable disable ingress filter mode ingress enable disable None Enable Disable default PVID isolation setting isolation disable None Set link mode uplink mode or user mode link mode uplink user None Set the maximum users allowed to access Internet based on user MAC address counter on per ATM PVC basis max mac lt number gt Name Description Maximum number of the MAC addresses Valid values 1 4096 lt number gt Default value 0 Type Mandatory Description VLAN priority value regeneration or Delete VLAN priority tag filter Syntax Parameter priority regen incoming lt incoming prio gt outgoing lt outgoing prio gt disable Name Description lt incoming Incoming VLAN priority value prio gt Valid values 0 7 307 5 9 10 stack Description Syntax Parameter 5 9 11 tcm policer Description Syntax Parameter Default value Type Mandatory lt outgoing prio gt Outgoing VLAN priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory Enable disable VLAN stacking stack enable disable None Bind Unbind Three Color Marking TCM Policer profile tcm policer lt number gt bind unbind Name Description lt number gt TCM policer profile index Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 9 12 vlan
183. ion VLAN 4 1 User Mode H 1 User Mode C_VLAN Stacking Replaced Mode sTag ether type Ox 8100 Set ADSL D Port 1 z Pve 1 D Port Default VID VLAN ID List 1 58 ADSL Port PwC 1 Delete ADSL VID ew CVLAH Priority UPLINK UPLINK Port UPLINK VID Priority Hew aor H VLAN MODE Create gt fr D Select Select z Select D ctac D GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN N 1 VLAN N 1 User Mode N 1 can also be called shared VLAN so in this mode MAC learning function of the bridge ports must not be disabled 1 Replaced N 1 In this mode the system will change the user port s C Tag to the Uplink port s S Tag And the mapping is N to 1 so a user port s C Tag can t be used for another VLAN translation rule But an uplink port s S Tag can be used for another N 1 VLAN translation rule So in this mode several bridge ports can have the same VLAN cross connect rule Translation VLAN 4 1 User Mode Hi User Mode C_VLAN Stacking Replaced Mode sTag ether type Ox om Set Port Default VID VLAH ID List ADSL Port PwC 1 EE Delete UPLIHK Priority ADSL VID UPLIHK Port UPLINK VID VLAH MODE Create gt hez Select zl Select zl REPLACED N1 GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN 4 3 2 4 Static Allowed IP This option allows you to configure the Static Allowed IP table From the Bridge menu
184. iority Out 9 z _Creste GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup Differentiated Services Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 Query To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to retrieve Delete To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete orca D cicat D Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Incoming DS Click on the drop down list and select the incoming DSCP Diffserv Code Points which is a 6 bit number The standardized combinations are listed below default Default value bits 000000 af11 Assured Forwarding Class 1 Low Drop bits 001010 af12 Assured Forwarding Class 1 Medium Drop bits 001100 af13 Assured Forwarding Class 1 High Drop bits 001110 af21 Assured Forwarding Class 2 Low Drop bits 010010 af22 Assured Forwarding Class 2 Medium Drop bits 010100 af23 Assured Forwarding Class 2 High Drop bits 010110 115 af31 Assured Forwarding Class 3 Low Drop bits 011010 af32 Assured Forwarding Class 3 Medium Drop bits 011100 af33 Assured Forwarding Class 3 High Drop bits 011110 af41 Assured Forwarding Class 4 Low Drop bits 100010 af42
185. ktei i 8 SR Data Source GBE1 D oe DN opge he Owner RMON RMON2 RMON Rx DropEvents 00000000 00000000 00000000 Rx Bytes 00000000 00000000 00000000 Rx Packets 00000000 00000000 00000000 Rx BroadcastPkts 00000000 00000000 00000000 Rx MulticastPkts 00000000 00000000 00000000 Rx CRC Align Errors 00000000 00000000 00000000 Rx Undersize Pkts 00000000 00000000 00000000 Rx Oversize Pkts 00000000 00000000 00000000 Rx Fragments 00000000 00000000 00000000 Rx Jabbers o0000000 00000000 00000000 Tx Collisions 00000000 KKK oo000000 Tx Rx Pkts 64bytes 00008200 00008200 00008200 TxiRx Pkts 65 127bytes 00000000 00000000 00000000 Tx Rx Pkts 128 255bytes o0000000 00000000 00000000 Tx Rx Pkts 256 511bytes 00000000 00000000 00000000 Tx Rx Pkts 512 1023bytes 00000000 00000000 00000000 TxiRx Pkts 1024 1518bytes 00000000 00000000 00000000 Tx Bytes oc208000 00208000 00208000 Tx Packets oc008200 00008200 00008200 Tx Multicast Pkts Keck 00000000 00000000 Tx Broadcast Pkts oco08200 00008200 00008200 To modify an entry in this table click on the index to select the entry type in new value and then click on Modify To delete an entry click on the index to select the entry and then click on Delete 194 The following parameters are monitored in this table RMON ETH Statistics variables Variable Description Rx DropEvents Monitoring rx dropped packets Rx Bytes Monitoring rx bytes packets Rx Packet Monitoring rx packets
186. l Channel Identifier Valid values 21 32 65535 Default value 35 Type Mandatory List ATM traffic descriptor pvc atmdesc None 5 7 31 pvc atmdesc plc Description Syntax Parameter Set ATM police Rx descriptor pvc atmdesc plc lt number gt Name Description lt number gt ATM descriptor number Valid values Enter pvc atmdesc command to see the descriptor list Default value Type Mandatory 297 5 7 32 pvc atmdesc shp Description Set ATM shaped Tx descriptor Syntax pvc atmdesc shp lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt ATM descriptor number Valid values Enter pvc atmdesc command to see the descriptor list Default value Type Mandatory 5 7 33 pvc encapsulation Description Set Encapsulation type Syntax pvc encapsulation llc vemux auto Parameter None Note The IDL 2402 supports auto detection of the ATM AAL5 encapsulation method LLC or VC Mux Meanwhile the IDL 2402 is also able to automatically sense the following protocol encapsulations PPPoE over ATM per RFC 2684 IPoE over ATM bridge mode and PPP over ATM IPoA works on individual PVC However there are limitations on auto detection of encapsulations 1 LLC VC Mux automatically detection is only applicable to PVC 1 PVC 4 of each ADSL port PVC 5 PVC 8 must be assigned the ATM AAL5 encapsulation method manually 2
187. lick on the drop down lists to select port range and PVC first Then the data of these PVCs bridge ports you selected will be displayed Click on the radio button to select the PVC you want to create modify or delete ADSL PVC Setup Label Description VPI Type in the VPI value 0 255 Default value is 0 VC Type in the VCI value 21 32 65535 Default value is 35 Click on the drop down list and select a traffic type for transmit and receive Traffic direction respectively Available options are created in the ATM Traffic Descriptor page See section 4 5 1 86 Enda Select AAL5 Encapsulation Type VCMUX LLC or AUTO for PVC 1 p PVC 4 only Select in the drop down list to enable or disable protocol based VLAN Protocol Based VLAN function When protocol based VLAN is enabled the bridge port will work according to the protocol based VLAN table refer to section 4 3 2 Select the check box to copy specified circuit to all remainder circuits in An current page Create Click on the radio button to select a PVC bridge port that has not been created Set the parameter values and then click on Create to create a PVC Modif Click on the radio button to select the PVC bridge port you want to modify y Change the parameter values and then click on Modify Delete Click on the radio button to select the PVC bridge port you want to delete Then click on Delete to remove the PV
188. llowed at transition of LO to L2 state or an L2 low power trim request Syntax power mgt 12 atpr lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt L2 power reduction range value Valid values 0 31 dB Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 16 power mgt I2 atprt Description Set total maximum aggregate transmit power reduction in dB that is allowed in the L2 state the total reduction is the sum of all reductions of L2 Request i e at transition of LO to L2 state and L2 power trims Syntax power mgt 2 atprt lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt L2 total power reduction value Valid values 0 31 dB Default value Type Mandatory 359 5 19 17 psdlevel Description Set PSD level Syntax Parameter 5 19 18 psdshape Description Set PSD shape Syntax Parameter psdlevel ds us max lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Maximum PSD level tenth dBm Hz Valid values 60 40 downstream step 0 1 60 38 upstream step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory psdshape ds cut off lt number gt standard Name Description number Cut off frequencies at carrier Valid values 100 280 step 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 19 rxaggregate us max powerlevel Description Set maximum aggregate receive power level Syntax Parameter rxaggregate us
189. lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 43 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us gain Description Display carrier information of far end gain upstream by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us gain Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 44 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us tss Description Display carrier information of far end tss upstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all port gt adsl carrier fe us tss Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 226 5 3 45 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us snr Description Display carrier information of near end snr upstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us snr Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 46 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us qin Description Display carrier information of near end qin upstream by
190. lue 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt netmask gt Subnet mask Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value Type Optional Display source IP deny access list srcip list None 324 5 12 19 srcmac Description Specify source MAC of packets to reject Show specify source MAC deny access list entry Delete specify source MAC deny access list entry Syntax srcmac lt number gt deny edel lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt mac lt mac address gt srcmac lt number gt list srcmac lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Source MAC deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt mac address gt MAC address Valid values xx xx xx xx xx xx xx 00 ff Default value 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Mandatory 5 12 20 srcmac list Description Display source MAC deny access list Syntax srcmac list Parameter None 325 5 13 ATM Description Mode Commands 5 13 1 cbr Description CBR traffic setting Syntax cbr lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type
191. m To Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number value 1 256 Query Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to display the filter rules Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter rules in the table aps D Port 1 z Pvc D Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Destination MAC Type in the Destination MAC address Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 105 Ether Type Filtering Ether Type Filtering Filtering Typel Ether Type D No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL D Port 1 sllpvc3 x Next No 3 Incoming EtherType Ox Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Ether Type Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here No From To Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number value 1 256 Query Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to display the filter rules Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter rules in the table aps D Port 1 feve D Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Incoming
192. mIsdn_NonOverlapped IV s bit08 992 2_4 Pots _NonOverlapped J e bit10 992 2_C_TcmIsdn_NonOverlapped IV gt bit18 992 3_4 Pots _NonOverlapped I afbit20 992 3_B_Isdn_NonOverlapped T ofbit24 992 4_A_Pots_NonOverlapped J sofbit28 992 3_I_AllDigital_NonOverlapped I 11 bit30 992 3_3_AllDigital_NonOverlapped I s2fbit32 992 4_I_AllDigital_NonOverlapped IV ssfbit34 992 3_L_Pots_NonOverlapped_Mode1 J sa bit35 992 3_L_Pots_NonOverlapped_Mode2 E 15 bit39 992 3_M_Pots_Extend_US NonOverlapped I s6fbit40 992 5_A Pots _NonOverlapped IV s7 bit4 2 992 5_B_Isdn_NonOverlapped I safbit46 992 5_1_allDigital_NonOverlapped I s9fbit4 8 ANSI_T1424 J afbit49 ETSI_TS_101_270 J 2x bitS0 993 1 J 2 fbitS1 IEEE_8023ah J a5 bit56 992 5_J_AllDigital_NonOverlapped 2sfbit58 992 5_M_Pots_Extend_US_NonOverlapped ADSL Spectrum RFI ADSL Spectrum Carrier Mask To be continued 146 To be continued Click on this button to view modify the current downstream upstream Carrier Mask parameters Input Carrier bit value and then click Apply Modify Status Complete modems will re train after you click on Apply button ADSL Spectrum Profile 1 Carrier MASK Modify Status Complete Carriers 0 to 255 are used for all ADSL ADSL2 operational modes except for ADSL2 Plus which uses carriers 0 to 511 ADSL Spectrum RFI ADSL Spectrum OP Mode IP DSLAM Terms and conditions Copyright 2007 1
193. max powerlevel lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Maximum aggregate receive power level 255 255 tenth dBm Valid values 25 5 25 5 step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory 360 5 19 20spectrum name Description Set spectrum profile name Syntax spectrum name lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt Name of the spectrum profile max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 21 status modify complete Description Set the status of modification Syntax status modify complete Parameter None 361 5 20 TCA Profile Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the TCA Profile execution mode 5 20 1 adsl tca day Description Set threshold value for near end far end day PM Syntax adsl tca day ne fe es ses uas lt number Parameter Name Description number Threshold value Valid values 0 86400 Default value Type Mandatory 5 20 2 adsl tca disable Description Disable TCA Syntax adsl tca disable Parameter None 5 20 3 adsl tca enable Description Enable TCA Syntax adsl tca enable Parameter None 5 20 4 adsl tca interval Description Set threshold value for near end far end interval PM Syntax adsl tca interval ne fe es ses uas lof lol los errframe lt number Parameter Name Description number Threshold v
194. me Type in the NE name in the cluster Domain Type in the name of the cluster domain Valid options are Cluster Master or Slave is decided by the system Slave only role of the Roig DLSAM is always Slave and Individual not in a cluster Voting Key Type in 0 or a positive integer as the priority to be Master 0 means to let system decides Master and Slaves If positive integer is typed in the smaller the number is the higher priority 69 for the DSLAM to be a master in a cluster But if there s already a Master in a cluster a new added DSLAM cannot try to be the Master by entering a smaller voting key number the Master cannot be changed in this way Type in the cluster IP address Users can connect to and manage the cluster via the cluster l IP address through in band connection Netmask Type in the cluster s subnet mask Gateway Type in the cluster s gateway IP address ID This field shows Cluster ID which indicates cluster ordering Modify Click on this button to submit the modification Query Click on this button to query current status To control a member in the cluster Select a Cluster member from the drop down list above the menu tree Then you are controlling that NE now Cluster Setup Cluster Configuration Modify Query Slave Only Cluster Infomation Every time you modify the setting for example changing the Role of any clus
195. mperature C This field shows the current system temperature The system will produce notification alarm when the monitored Up Shift Threshold C system temperature is higher than Up Shift Threshold 55 85 C for over Up Shift Time 1 255 sec Up Shift Time Sec Refer to the description for Up Shift Threshold Down Shift Threshold C The system will produce notification alarm when the monitored system temperature is lower than Down Shift Threshold 55 85 C for over Down Shift Time 1 255 sec Down Shift Time Sec Refer to the description for Down Shift Threshold FAN Enable temperature threshold 40 15 C When the system Fan ON Threshold C temperature is higher than the threshold the fan will be turned on automatically Fan Shift Time Sec This field shows the elapsed time since the FAN was turned on 188 4 7 6 Performance Monitoring 4 7 6 1 System Utilization This option allows you to monitor the memory utilization and network processor utilization From the Maintenance menu click on Performance Monitoring and then System Utilization The following page is displayed System Utilization Current Memory Utilization Current CPU Utilization 189 4 7 6 2 Ethernet Statistics This option allows you to view the Gigabit Ethernet counter values for the trunk or line interface From the Maintenance menu click on Performance Monitoring and then Ethernet St
196. n Database Configuration Write downloaded Config to Flash in progress Database Configuration Fer EH Write to memory successfully Database Configuration Ajlmport File Arite Download Config To FLASH e Fail to Get File Adlmport File Arite Download Config To FLASH 174 B Import File Load Remote Config to Running Config Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download Then click on Get File button Database Configuration DB Config Select B Import File Load Remote Config to Running Contig e TFTP Server pp 172 16 10 241 File Name oonfigl Get File Load to Running Config successfully Database Configuration DB Contig Select B Import File Load Remote Config to Running Config v TFTP Server p 172 16 10 241 File Name Config Get File Fail to Get File Database Configuration DB Config Select B lmport File Load Remote Contig to Running Contig x TFTP Server p 17216 1028 File Name foonfigl Get File 175 C Export File Put Running Config to Remote TFTP Server Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to export Then click on Put File button Database Configuration DB Contig Select CjExport File Put Running Contig To Remote TFTP Server DI TFTP Server pe 172 16 10 241 File Name confizl Put File TFTP put file successfully Database Configuration
197. n 192 168 1 10 24 Front panel connection of IDL 2402 ADSL2 2 CPE UPLINK Port Connect to Internet by RJ 45 cable Console Port Connect to PC by RS 232 console cable in order to administer your IP DSLAM through CLI The Console interface on the front panel is the main control interface of the IDL 2402 The RJ45 connector pin assignment is illustrated below 12345678 dl 3 4 6 Other pins TX RX GND unused Console Port RJ 45 pin assignment 25 To connect the host PC to the console port a RJ45 male connector to RS232 DB9 female connector cable is required The RJ45 connector of the cable is connected to the Console port of the DSLAM the DB9 connector of the cable is connected to the PC COM port The pin assignment of the console cable is shown below DB 9F RJ 45M Pin Pin 2 RD Pin 3 TD Pin 5 DGND 00 Ni Od A GO PO Pin Assignment of Console Cable Step 3 Hook power cord and apply the power 26 2 3 WEB Configuration This section describes how to use Web Configuration Tool to maintain your IP DSLAM The IDL 2402 contains a HTTP server You can login and configure it by using your Web Browser 2 3 1 System Prepartion Before attempting to configure the IDL 2402 please ensure as below Set your computer s IP with the same network mask of the router For example Router s default IP is 192 168 1 1 255 255
198. n Description for the RMON event Syntax rmon event lt index gt description lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt Event description Valid values string type value max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 270 5 4 88 rmon event lt index gt owner Description Set RMON event owner Syntax rmon event lt index gt owner lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt Owner name Valid values string type value max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 89 rmon event lt index gt type Description Set RMON event type no alarm only syslog only SNMP trap or both syslog and SNMP trap Syntax rmon event lt index gt type none log trap both Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 90 rmon history lt index gt buckets_requested Description Set RMON history buckets requested Syntax rmon history lt index gt buckets_requested lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Buckets r
199. n these drop down lists to select the bridge ports to be displayed these bridge ports must have been created in previous web page Query Click on this button to display table Modify Click on this button to submit the modification of DSL line identify table Select Port Bridge port index Select the checkbox s corresponding to the circuit s of which you want to modify the setting Circuit ID Type in the Circuit ID when CUSTOMER is selected for the CKT Type Remote ID Type in the Remote ID when CUSTOMER is selected for the Remote Type Click on this drop down list and specify the circuit to be trusted TRUE or Trusted untrusted FALSE the relay agent will discard the DHCP packets from an unstrusted circuit 130 4 3 6 IGMP 4 3 6 1 Protocol amp Router Port This option allows you to setup the IGMP protocol and router port From the Bridge menu click on IGMP and then Protocol amp Router Port The following page is displayed IGMP Protocol amp Router Port IGMP Protocol Settings Modify All of the interval from 1 to 500 Query Query Interval URI Unsolicited Report Interval BC Older host present interval MRT Max Response Time LMQT Last Member Query Time GMT Group Membership Time readonly ae ee osaa Tanz Dated RR mm ICH mm mm M Router Port Settings GIGA1 Router Port VID 1 Router peo fp pf fp The IGMP Router s IP is available while IGMP in Proxy mode
200. nd select the Policer profile you want to bind with this port Binding Status Select to bind ON or unbind OFF the Policer profile 123 H Three Color Marking Policer The IDL 2402 supports TCM Policer in accordance with the Metro Ethernet Forum MEF Bandwidth Profile and RFCs 2697 amp 2698 Our TCM Policer supports both Color Aware and Color Blind modes The color is used for determining whether a packet will proceed to the policer when TCM Policer works in Color Aware mode also in the policer the packet may be remarked with new color according to the packet s conformance to the policer rules A packet is considered green when it enters the TCM Policer only if its input color field VLAN priority bits or DSCP field has the same value with the green value configured in this page see the following figure and parameter description Likewise a packet is considered yellow only if its input color field has the same value with the yellow value configured in this page All other values are considered red Once a packet has passed through the TCM Policer it will be directed to the class queues for scheduling Rate Limit Three Color Marking Rate Limit Typel Three Color Marking x If the Color Field is YLAN Priority mode then the Colors Value are 0 7 If the Color Field is DSCP mode then the Colors Value range are 0 63 Modify Query DYLAN Priority e Rate Limit Policer Binding Setup
201. ne Identify PPP Service Name PPP Service Name Check Disabled e DSLAM Name IPDSLAM DSLAM Name mode Customer v Dhcp Model Relay OFF ID Select Circuit D e Circuit ID Type DEFAULT 7 Remote ID Type DEFAULT e zl DSL Line ID Configuration Port 01 12 a Pve 1 7 Query Modify IPDSLAM 001 000 00035 IPDSLAM 001 1 FALSE sl IPDSLAM 002 000 00035 IPDSLAM 002 1 FALSE Ej IPDSLAM 004 000 00035 IPDSLAM 004 1 FALSE sl Ej IPDSLAM 005 000 00035 IPDSLAM 005 1 FALSE sl Ej IPDSLAM 006 000 00035 IPDSLAM 006 1 FALSE sl Ce Ee a IPDSLAM 008 000 00035 IPDSLAM 008 1 FALSE sl Ej IPDSLAM 009 000 00035 IPDSLAM 009 1 FALSE sl Ej IPDSLAM 010 000 00035 IPDSLAM 010 1 FALSE d a IPDSLAM 011 000 00035 IPDSLAM 011 1 FALSE sl DSL Line Identify Setup Label Description DSL Global Configuration PPP Service Name Type in the PPPoE service name to add Enable the system will check whether the PPPoE service names from the PPP Service Name PPPoE server and client are the same If not the same the PPP connection EE between server and client will not be established Disable the system will not check the PPPoE service name DSLAM Name Type in name of the DSLAM when DSLAM Name mode is set to Customer 129 DSLAM Name mode Select the DSLAM name to be customer defined or cluster name Domain name NE name DHCP Mode Click on this drop down list and select OFF ON to
202. neration or Delete VLAN priority tag filter Syntax Parameter priority regen incoming lt incoming prio gt outgoing lt outgoing prio gt disable Name Description lt incoming Incoming VLAN priority value prio gt 303 Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt outgoing prio gt Outgoing VLAN priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 5 8 10 stack Description Enable disable VLAN stacking Syntax stack enable disable Parameter None 5 8 11 tcm policer Description Bind Unbind Three Color Marking TCM Policer profile Syntax tcm policer lt number gt bind unbind Parameter Name Description lt number gt TCM policer profile index Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 8 12 vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Description Delete a VLAN from memberset table Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 304 5 8 13 vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 8 14 vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority Description Set VLAN memberset priority Specify priority level or reserved the or
203. nmp target lt name gt version 278 5 4 111 snip polling Wl 279 Ee 279 54113 SVSIOG SENE ee 279 5 4 114 tem color aware EEN 279 5 4 115 tem color field eege eege 280 54 Metem Or Ee ea a e eee eee et ce ede et ee ee ete ee 280 5A TAZ TCM e Ee eu e E 280 LS Pe ER un KE 280 5 4 119 tem V GIO 228 Assi oct Siete stearate eg 281 54 120 temperature threshold EE 281 5 4 121 temperature shelf time EEN 281 dies UNE SET ENEE Aere EE 282 Py Nl PPG HEED eee Ne er 282 5 4 124 time Set Umezone ee eccecceeeecccecceeeeeeeceeseeeecceeneeeecteesceeeesaeseeeeetaees 283 54 125 vlan ethertype s tag EE 284 EE Ree e EEN 284 5 4 127 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one285 5 4 128 vian translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt many to one EE 286 5 4 129 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt disable s nnnneeeeneeennne 287 5 5 Ethernet Interface Mode Commandes ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 288 D0 ONO E 288 95 2 0HE AdMe E Aa E datadvcs toda AAA 288 POs e e EE 288 5 6 Interface Mode COMMANGS cccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 289 ER Bridge EE 289 5 62 o o LO WEEN 289 E Ee eege A E 289 5 7 ATM Bridge Mode Commands ccccsssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeees 290 Del WACOM EE 290 Df 2 ACCOUNTING disable EE 290 5 7 3 accounting CMADI EN 290 5 7 4 RUIN CNS
204. nslation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt disable Description Syntax Parameter Name Description lt port gt ADSL Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt ADSL port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 287 5 5 Ethernet Interface Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Ethernet Interface execution mode 5 5 1 bridge Description Syntax Parameter 5 5 2 gbe admin Description Syntax Parameter 5 5 3 gbe speed Description Syntax Parameter Enter bridge configuration mode Set bridge port to default status bridge default None Set Gigabit Ethernet administrative status ON OFF gbe admin on off None Set Gigabit ethernet speed to auto negotiate 100Mbps half duplexing or 100Mbps full duplexing gbe speed auto half_100mbps full_100mbps None 288 5 6 Interface Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Interface execution mode 5 6 1 bridge Description Enter ATM bridge configuration mode Disable bridge port Syntax bridge lt bridge id gt disable Parameter Name Description bridge id Bridge number Valid values 1 8 Default value 1 Type Mandatory 5 6 2 adsl config Description Enter
205. ntax mcfldrate list Parameter None 5 12 16 mcfldrate vlan Description Display flooding rate limiting list Syntax mcfldrate vlan lt VLAN ID gt list disable cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt Cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value 80000 Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Leakage Bucket Size millisecond Valid values 1 1024 Default value 80 Type Mandatory 5 12 17 srcip Description Specify source IP address of packets to filter Show specify source IP deny access list entry Delete specify source IP deny access list entry Syntax srcip lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt ip lt ipv4 address gt lt net mask gt 323 Parameter 5 12 18 srcip list Description Syntax Parameter srcip lt numbers gt list srcip lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Source IP deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Destination IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default va
206. ntify dhcp option82 dslam name customer Parameter None 5 4 25 dsl line identify dhcp option82 sub Description Set DHCP Option82 sub mode send Circuit ID send Remote ID send Both Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 sub circuit remote both Parameter None 5 4 26 dsl line identify dhcp option82 remote Description Set Remote ID type as Default Line ID Line Description Line phone number Customer default type is lt DSLAM name gt lt bridge port index gt customer type means the customer defined type Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 remote default line id line descr line phone customer Parameter None 252 5 4 27 dsl line identify pppoe srv name Description Set Service Name Syntax dsl line identify pppoe srv name lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt Set Service name Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 28 dsl line identify pppoe srv name check Description Disable Enable PPPoE Service Name check Syntax dsl line identify pppoe srv name check disable enable Parameter None 5 4 29 fdbstatic lt number gt xdsl gigabit Description Static MAC forwarding table setting Syntax fdbstatic lt number gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt mac mac address gt deny pass fdbstatic lt number gt gigabit lt port gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt mac mac address gt deny pass Parameter Name Description lt number gt
207. nual for PLANET IP DSLAM Model IDL 2402 Rev 1 0 Oct 2008 Part No EM IDL2402_ vi Table of Contents T Introduction EN 16 Lt Product FOQtUieS siicicscciinisecivesicenccertsancvantvacdsasevassnantuenccecdcescwantuascwacdranteandsencuands 16 1 2 PACKAGES Conlemteg esvusmeeoeuueseekeuNVEEEOEKSNEEEEAEOEEEUNENNNESNEEEEEUNEKNKERNERENEEEEEERNER 17 T SApplicatio e WEEN 18 U tasnvrisiteativthivabtashioainattadintbiestinhddebiaphicdinsbdvadsathivainashluablashtouninehtvabtaahiey 19 EE EEN 19 1 5 Technical Specification sniicccccccicessiascvensceeisesscasssaniseccueciceneanaverdeecccasieendseadaccs 20 2s WS LANA ON EE 22 2 1 Safely INSU CH ON E 22 2 2 Hardware INStallatiO Mm ccs ictutssttetosssisataieritutanspbsutidphivtinusbsadtdpbitienbsntneealiodinnsiinn 23 2 2 1 SYSISM REQUIFEMEMIS ees 23 2 2 2 Installation Procedure EEN 23 2 9 WEB Configuration osciiicsiisiinscesecineniensssescancescsieuninsnsnseusanunieinenenseansennieaeeneninns 27 2 3 1 System Prepartion EE 27 2 3 2 WEB Configuration Procedure EE 27 2 3 3 How to backup Restore the Configuration ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 32 2 3 4 Firmware Update EE 42 3 Software Introduction NEE 45 3 1 E Ce e EE 45 3 1 1 Features of Management Interface EEN 46 3 2 Configuration Management ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 47 3 2 1 Bridge Configuration EE 48 3 2 2 ADSL GOniQuraulon HE 49 3 3 Performance MaNnageMe nl cccccsess
208. o 511 bytes Tx Rx Pkts 512 1023bytes Monitoring tx rx 512 to 1023 bytes Tx Rx Pkts 1024 1518bytes Monitoring tx rx 1024 to 1518 bytes Tx Bytes Monitoring tx bytes packets Tx Packet Monitoring tx packets Tx MulticastPkts Monitoring tx multicast packets Tx BroadcastPkts Monitoring tx broadcast packets Table 3 2 RMON ETH History Control variables Variable Description HistoryDropEvents Monitoring rx dropped packets Historybytes Monitoring rx bytes packets HistoryPackets Monitoring rx packets HistoryBroadcastPkts Monitoring rx broadcast packets HistoryMulticastPkts Monitoring rx multicast packets HistoryCRCAlignErrors Monitoring rx error aligment packets 52 HistoryUndersizePkts Monitoring rx undersize packets HistoryOversizePkts Monitoring rx oversize packets HistoryFragments Monitoring rx fragments packets HistoryJabbers Monitoring rx jabber packets HistoryCollisions Monitoring tx single collision packets History TxBytes Monitoring tx bytes HistoryTxPackets Monitoring tx packets HistoryTxMulticast Monitoring tx multicast History TxBroadcast Monitoring tx broadcast HistoryUtilization Monitoring tx Utilization 53 3 4 Fault Management Fault management is conceptually partitioned into two levels the system top level and interface specifi
209. o view the inventory of the ATUC and ATUR From the ADSL menu click on Data amp Inventory and then Inventory The following page is displayed ADSL Inventory Port O1 12 D Atuxc ATUC x Query Circuit Setup System Inventory J ADSL Inventory Label Description Port 01 12 D Click on this drop down list and select the ports to be displayed Atux Select ATUC or ATUR inventory to be displayed To view inventory click on this button once you have selected the port and Query ATUx 153 4 4 2 2 Loop Test This option allows you to do the ADSL Dual End Loop Test From the ADSL menu click on Data amp Inventory and then Loop Test The following page is displayed ADSL Dual End Loop Test Port 1 x Diagnostics Run Diagnostics Abort DIAGNOSTICS Run zem gt Residential Residential WEB GUI Click on the drop down list and select the line port you want to test Then click on Diagnostics Run to start a DELT If you want to discontinue the test or make the loop go back to the normal state when the test has finished just click on Diagnostics Abort Test in progress Click on Diagnostics Run and then the following page is displayed ADSL Dual End Loop Test Port 1 Diagnostics Run Diagnostics Abort LOOP DIAGNOSTICS INIT 154 Test completed When the test has completed successfully test result is displayed as follows ADSL Dual End Loop Te
210. ogin FTP server that firmware image belongs to firmware login lt ipv4 address gt username lt name gt password Description Syntax lt password gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IPV4 address Valid values xxx xxx xXxx XXX Default value Type Mandatory xxx 0 255 lt name gt User name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt password gt Input password max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 34 firmware partition Description Description Set booting partition Syntax firmware partition lt number gt Parameter Name lt number gt Partition number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 35 firmware upgrade Get firmware image from FTP server and write to Flash ROM firmware upgrade lt filename gt Description Description Syntax Parameter Name lt filename gt Path and File name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 255 5 4 36 http port Description Set http server listening port Syntax http port lt port number gt Parameter Name Description port number The port number Valid values Integer range 0 65535 Default value 80 Type Mandatory 5 4 37 igmp acl Description IGMP ACL control mode Syntax igmp acl enable disable Parameter None 5 4 38 igmp default Description IGMP set default Syntax igmp default
211. on82 remote cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 252 5 4 27 dsl line identify pppoe sn name 253 5 4 28 dsl line identify pppoe Sn name check 253 5 4 29 fdbstatic lt number gt xdsl gigabit cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 253 5 4 30 fdbstatic lt number gt disable A 254 54 31 tee ee 254 5 4 32 firmware bootcode upgrade ee 254 5 4 89 firmware EE ees 255 524 34 firmware Eu e EE 255 5 4 35 firmware upgrade cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 255 ENEE 256 Ee ale RT BEE 256 Ee le ee E EE 256 5 4 39 igmp deny no router aert 256 5 4 40 igmp CISA EE 256 5 4 41 mp max group limit eee cece cece eee ee eeeeeeeeee eee eee eeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 256 94 42 NGI Ol ONY EE 257 EEN 257 5 4 44 igmp rtport gigabit ceeeceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 257 DA 4S IGMP Net 257 5 4 46 igmp Kn 258 5 4 47 i gMp RTE 258 5 4 48 interface e e Ee 258 54 49 interface EN 258 En ege ul ie EE 259 5 4 51 mac spoofing detect og 259 5 4 52 management Q0Gr sorts Arta EECH 259 5 4 53 management gbe vlan 3 cee sseleees Solete de es etees lend ea lsiyee eelaae ds oaleteds cade tak 259 5 4 54 management gbe vlan Droit 260 EE tee a eee mec E E EE 260 5 4 56 port template MaSK sssssssssnnnnteeeseerttttnrnreesertnrtnnnnnnnserrnnnnnnn nennen nnne 260 5 4 57 port template UNMASK EEN 260 5 4 58 port template template pont 261 5459 PNOY
212. onfiguration that an operator is using The following chapters provide a general description of the setup and configuration details Table 4 1 Pages of the Web Configuration Tool System System Information Board IP Setup Ethernet Port Service ADSL Port Service CLI Setup Cluster Setup System Inventory SNTP IP Routes User Administration Duplicator 802 1x Security System Protocol RADIUS amp Local Profile Bridge GIGA Bridge ADSL PVC Interface Setup ADSL Brid ridge ADSL Port Security Static VLAN Protocol Based VLAN VLAN Configuration Translation VLAN Static Allowed IP MAC Spoofing Filtering VLAN Priority Remark Access Control Rate Limit Priority Queue Mapping TP Forwarding DB Forwarding Forwarding Static 60 Relay DSL Line Identify Protocol amp Route Port IGMP IGMP Profile IGMP Multicast BRAS MAC IPOA Interface Setup ADSL Service Profile main Service Profile Channel Profile Spectrum Profile main Spectrum Profile ADSLx TCA Profile Inventory Loop Test Data amp Inventory Carrier Data OP Data Line Config amp Info Se GE Line Information Traffic ATM Traffic Descriptor SNMP SNMP Community SNMP Target SNMP Notify Maintenance SYS Log Server Database Firmware Update ATM L
213. oopbacks Fault Management Alarm Event Alarm Profile Hardware Temp Performance Monitoring System Utilization Ethernet Statistics ATM Siatistics RMON ADSL Day Interval 61 4 1 System 4 1 1 System Information The System Information page the default page you ll see after you login the web configuration tool contains information about the user access level current system date and time current boot configuration partition system MAC address system HW SW FW version web configuration software version supported subscriber line type AnnexA or AnnexB GBE interface status and LED status SYS and ALM From the System menu click on System Info The following page is displayed System Information ACCESS LOGIN Access Level System Date FW Boot Active DB Current DB Super user 2008 09 09 Partition l Pappen Partition 1 SYSTEM VERSION Hardware Firmware Software Web Circuit 1 24 C 1 00805 1 00805 Mx 06 17b AnnexA IGA STATUS Gigal SYSLED ALM LED Bridge MAC Gigal MAC Config Enabled o 00 30 4F 71 99 0A 00 30 4F 71 99 09 P DSLAM Terms and conditions Copyright 2007 System Information Page 4 1 2 Board IP Setup This option allows you to configure the in band IP address setting VID management setting HTTP port setting etc From the System menu click on Board IP Setup The following page is displayed Vv Port 192 Inband VI
214. or an L2 low power trim request Value range is 0 the value of L2 ATPRT dB Type in the total maximum aggregate transmit power reduction in dB that is L2 ATPRT allowed in the L2 state the total reduction is the sum of all reductions of L2 Request Le at transition of LO to L2 state and L2 power trims Value range is 0 15 dB Direction DS downstream US upstream M Type in the minimum rate of the message based overhead that shall be maintained essage by the ATU in upstream downstream direction Value range is 4 28k bit s Noise Margin Type in the Noise Margin values Min Minimum noise margin 0 0 31 0 51 1db default 0 0 Tar Target noise margin 0 0 31 0 51 1db default 6 0 Max Maximum noise margin 0 0 31 0 51 1db default 51 1 Modify Click on this button to submit the modification Delete Click on this button to delete a profile Query Click on this button to display the profiles Click on this button to view modify allowed ADSL modes of operation for the profile The following page is displayed An OP Mode is supported if the check box is selected Modify Status Complete modems will re train after you click on Apply button ADSL Spectrum Profile 2 OP Mode Modify Status Complete Apply BACK Iv afbitOO ANSI_T1413 v if bitO1jJETSI_DTS_TMO6006 OP Mode N LS 2 bit02 992 1_4_Pots_NonOverlapped JV 5 bit04 992 1_B_Isdn_NonOverlapped J afbit06 992 1_C_Tc
215. ors to login system operating console Support up to 32 configurable SNMP trap destinations and allow the SNMP traps to be sent to any specified SNMP aware device for instance Network management center 46 3 2 Configuration Management The configuration management contains the following aspects 1 System Setup such as setup for management IP address net mask GBE interface including to enable disable and query the administrative operational status of the trunk port line port including to enable disable reset ADSL port query the administrative operational status of the port and bind profiles on a per port basis CLI session and timeout Cluster SNTP IP routes and user administration including login authorization and provides three security levels 2 Bridge Configuration see 3 2 1 Bridge Configuration below for more description 3 ADSL Configuration see 47 4 5 6 3 2 2 ADSL Configuration below for more description ATM traffic management SNMP setup The configuration management provides detecting and reporting to the operators through SNMP Trap for all memory updates reflecting changes in the system configuration It also provides logging the changes in the operational state and making this information available on demand to the operators over the operation interface The system contains a database DB to store all the provisioning data so that the configuration can be restored in re
216. ort lt number gt Parameter Name Description index RADIUS Server index Valid values 1 3 Default value Type Mandatory number RADIUS Server accounting port Valid values Default value 1813 Type Mandatory 364 5 21 5 server lt number gt max fail Description Set the maximum allowable times of continuously failed authentication attempts Syntax server lt index gt max fail lt number gt Parameter Name Description index RADIUS Server index Valid values 1 3 Default value Type Mandatory number RADIUS Server maximum fail number Valid values 1 10 Default value 2 Type Mandatory 5 21 6 server lt number gt secret Description Set the authentication key in text format Syntax server lt index gt secret lt string gt Parameter Name Description index RADIUS Server index Valid values 1 3 Default value Type Mandatory string Secret ID checked between NAS and RADIUS server Valid values max 16 character Default value Type Mandatory 365 5 21 7 server lt index gt vlan number Description The VID of the VLAN which the RADIUS server belongs to Syntax server lt index gt vlan lt number gt Parameter Name Description index RADIUS Server index Valid values 1 3 Default value Type Mandatory number VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory
217. otifications are sent Traps are used to report an alarm or other asynchronous event about a managed IDL 2402 system From the SNMP menu click on SNMP Target The following page is displayed SNMP Target Next No 2 New Target No No 1 Addr 192 168 7 243 D Query Delete Modify S fe SNMP Community Setup Label Description Click on this button to create a new SNMP target After you click on New the following page is displayed Type in the IP Address Name and Tag of the SNMP target Address Port Usually SNMP uses UDP port 161 for general SNMP messages and UDP port 162 for SNMP trap messages and select Trap Version V1 or V2c Then click on Apply button The Target Tag can be the same with a Notify Tag you can select the Notify Tag in the Use Notify Tag field The Notify Tag is created in the SNMP Notify table see next section When the Target Tag is the same with a Notify Tag the SNMP notification with that Notify Tag is sent to the Target with the same tag New 169 SNMP Target Apply Back SnmpTargetName1 SnmpTargetList1 123_Tag gt _Tag aoe Click on this drop down list and select the SNMP target number Query Select the target number and then click on this button to retrieve the information Delete Select the target number and then click on this button to delete a target Modify Select the target number and then click on this button to modify
218. outer port for Valid VID value is 1 4094 Type in IGMP router IP address When working in IGMP proxy mode DSLAM will send IGMP general query whose source IP address is 0 0 0 0 Router IP But PCs with Windows OS do not receive this kind of packets So user can assign an IP address here for proxy mode IGMP general query packet reference Create Click on this button to create a new entry Delete To delete an entry select the checkbox of the entry and then click on Delete button 132 4 3 6 2 IGMP Profile This option allows you to configure the IGMP ACL Access Control List profile This profile defines the IGMP multicast channels which are allowed to join for each ADSL port That is a multicast stream will be copied to an ADSL port only if that multicast stream is registered in the ACL profile that is bound to this ADSL port The maximum number of IGMP multicast channels in an ACL profile is 256 Note that the same multicast channel can be existed concurrently in two or more ACL profiles The ACL profile will be referred to only when ACL mode is enabled in the IGMP Configuration page refer to section 4 3 6 From the Bridge menu click on IGMP and then IGMP Profile The following page is displayed IGMP Profile page gt IGMP ACL Profile Profile 10 01 gt P CHANNEL MAP 1 Channel_001 032 Create Delete 1 Quickly VID Assign Assign IGMP ACL Profile Configurat
219. p allowed Description Display all static IP allowed access list or by index Syntax show access list ip allowed lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt Static IP allowed access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 217 5 3 8 show access list ipprotocol Description Display all IP protocol deny access list or by index Syntax show access list ipprotocol lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt IP Protocol deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 9 show access list 4dstport Description Display all L4 dest port deny access list or by index Syntax show access list l4dstport lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt L4 destination port deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 10 show access list mcfldrate Description Display all flooding rate limiting list or by VLAN ID Syntax show access list mcfldrate vlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 11 show access list srcip Description Display all source IP deny access list or by index Syntax show access list srcip lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt Source IP deny access list number Valid values 1 256
220. pe Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory CBR shaped traffic setting atmCloTransparentNoScr cbr shp lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 331 5 13 11 vbr shp Description Syntax Parameter VBR shaped traffic setting atmClpTransparentScr vbr shp lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt scr lt scr gt mbs lt mbs gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt lt SCI gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory Sustained Cell Rate Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt mbs gt Maximum Burst Size Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 332 5 13 12 vbrnrt Description Syntax Parameter VBR nrt shaped traffic setting atmClpNoTagging
221. pied to other ports Syntax port template mask xdsl lineconf xdsl profile xdsl adminstatus dsl dentify trust pvc vlan bridge igmp acl filter priority remark priority regen ethernet policer Parameter None 5 4 57 port template unmask Description Unmask the function profile of template line port Un Mask means not to select this item to be copied to other ports Syntax port template unmask xdsl lineconf xdsl profile xdsl adminstatus dsl dentify trust pvc vlan bridge igmp acl filter priority remark priority regen ethernet policer Parameter None 260 5 4 58 port template template port Description Select the template line port and pasted line port copy configuration from template port Syntax port template template port lt port gt paste port lt port gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt XDSL Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 59 priority list Description Go to Priority list execution mode from Configure mode Syntax priority list Parameter None 5 4 60 priority queue atm priority Description Set ATM interface priority queue mapping Syntax priority queue atm priority lt prio ID gt queue lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory lt number gt Priority queue value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Man
222. pped 34 992 3 L Pots NonOverlapped_Mode1 3 992 IA Pots Overlapped 35 992 3 L Pots NonOverlapped_Mode2 4 992 IB Isdn_NonOverlapped 36 992 3 L Pots Overlapped_Mode3 5 992 1 B Isdn_Overlapped 37 992 3 L Pots Overlapped_Mode4 6 992 1_C_Tcmlsdn_NonOverlapped 38 992 3 M Pots Extend US Overlapped 7 992 IC Tcmlsdn_Overlapped 39 992 3 M Pots Extend US NonOverlapped 8 992 2 A Pots NonOverlapped 40 992 5 A Pots _NonOverlapped 9 992 2 B Pots Overlapped 41 992 5 A Pots Overlapped 10 992 2 C_Tcmlsdn_NonOverlapped 42 992 5 B Isdn_NonOverlapped 11 992 2 C Tcmlsdn_Overlapped 43 992 5 B Isdn_Overlapped 18 992 3 A Pots NonOverlapped 46 992 5 AllDigital NonOverlapped 19 992 3 A Pots Overlapped 47 992 5 AllDigital_ Overlapped 20 992 3 B Isdn_NonOverlapped 48 ANSI T1 424 21 992 3 B Isdn_Overlapped 49 ETSI TS_101_ 270 24 992 4 A Pots NonOverlapped 50 993 1 25 992 4 A Pots Overlapped 51 IEEE 8023ah 28 992 3 AllDigital NonOverlapped 56 992 5 J AllDigital_ NonOverlapped 29 992 3 AllDigital Overlapped 57 992 5 J AllDigital_ Overlapped 30 992 3 J AllDigital_ NonOverlapped 58 992 5 M Pots Extend US NonOverlapped 31 992 3 J AllDigital_Overlapped 59 992 5 M Pots Extend US Overlapped 368 Appendix B Alarm Table Table B 1 Alarm Table Alarm ID Name Description 104 alm_fan_fail System Fan Fail 105 alm_self_test_fail System Self Test Fail 106 alm_above_temper System Above Temperature 10
223. ption Syntax Parameter 802 1x Timeout for Accounting Information Update interim interval lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Timeout for Accounting Information Updated Valid values 60 600 Default value 300 Type Mandatory Enable disable IP allowed function user can specify allowed source IP address per bridge port ip allowed enable disable None Enable Disable default PVID isolation setting isolation disable None Enable disable MAC learning ability of a bridge port max learning enable disable None 294 5 7 21 max reauth req Description 802 1x Max No of Retries to supplicant sending requests to the authentication server if no response is received Syntax max reauth req lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Max number of retries Valid values 1 10 Default value 2 Type Mandatory 5 7 22 max req Description 802 1x Max No of Retries to supplicant for EAP Request frames of types other than EAP Request Identity Syntax max req lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Max number of retries Valid values 1 10 Default value 2 Type Mandatory 5 7 23 max mac Description Set the maximum users allowed to access Internet based on user MAC address counter on per ATM PVC basis Syntax max mac lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt n
224. r gt TCM policer profile index Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 7 41 vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Description Delete a VLAN from memberset table Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 7 42 vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 300 5 7 43 vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority Description Set VLAN memberset priority specify priority level or reserved the original priority tag or untag enable or disable port isolation Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority lt prio ID gt reserved tag untag isolation disable Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 7 44 vlan list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan list Parameter None 301 5 8 GBE Bridge Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the GBE Bridge execution mode 5 8 1 accfrm Description Set acceptable frame type untagged only tagged only or all Syntax accfrm all tag untag
225. r information of far end qin downstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds qin Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 40 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlin Description Display carrier information of far end hlin downstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlin Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 41 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlog Description Display carrier information of far end hlog downstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds blog Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 225 5 3 42 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us load Description Display carrier information of far end load upstream by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us load Parameter Name Description
226. racies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual that is incorrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense FCC Caution To assure continued compliance example use only shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subjec
227. raffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following the VBR 3 conformance definition Policed UBR1 atmNoCLPNoScrCdvt This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP with CDVT and no Sustained Cell Rate This traffic descriptor type is applicable to CBR connections following the UNI 3 0 3 1 conformance definition for PCR CLP 0 1 These CBR connections differ from CBR 1 connections in that the CLR objective applies only to the CLP 0 cell flow This traffic descriptor type is also applicable to connections following the UBR 1 conformance definition Policed UBR2 atmNoCLPTaggingNoScr This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP with tagging and no Sustained Cell Rate This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following the UBR 2 conformance definition Shaped UBR atmNoCLPNoScr This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP and no Sustained Cell Rate Shaped VBR atmCLPTransparent This traffic descriptor type is for the CLP transparent model with Sustained Cell Rate This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following the VBR 1 conformance definition Connections specifying this traffic descriptor type will be rejected at UNI 3 0 or UNI 3 1 interfaces For a similar traffic descriptor type that can be accepted at UNI 3 0 and UNI 3 1 interfaces see atmNoClpScr 166 Create Delete Click on this button to create a new traffic descriptor When you want to delete a traffic
228. rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt SCcIr gt Sustained Cell Rate Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt mbs gt Maximum Burst Size Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 329 5 13 8 vbr3 Description Syntax Parameter VBR type 3 traffic setting atmClpTaggingScrCdvt vbr3 lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt scr lt scr gt mbs lt mbs gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt lt SCI gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory Sustained Cell Rate Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt mbs gt Maximum Burst Size Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 330 5 13 9 ubr shp Description Syntax Parameter 5 13 10 cbr shp Description Syntax Parameter UBR shaped traffic setting atmNoClpNoScr ubr shp lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Ty
229. re Unshaped atmNoTrafficDescriptor This identifies no ATM traffic descriptor type This traffic descriptor type can be used for best effort traffic Descriptor Policed CBR atmCLPTransparentNoScr Shaped CBR atmCLPTransparentNoScr This traffic descriptor type is for the CLP transparent model and no Sustained Cell Rate This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following the CBR 1 conformance definition Connections specifying this traffic descriptor type will be rejected at UNI 3 0 or UNI 3 1 165 interfaces For a similar traffic descriptor type that can be accepted at UNI 3 0 and UNI 3 1 interfaces see atmNoClpNoScr Policed VBR1 atmNoCLPScrCadvt This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP with Sustained Cell Rate and CDVT This traffic descriptor type is applicable to VBR connections following the UNI 3 0 3 1 conformance definition for PCR CLP 0 1 and SCR CLP 0 1 These VBR connections differ from VBR 1 connections in that the CLR objective applies only to the CLP 0 cell flow Policed VBR2 atmCLPNoTaggingScrCdvt Shaped VBRNRT atmCLPNoTaggingScrCadvt This traffic descriptor type is for CLP with Sustained Cell Rate and CDVT and no tagging This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following the VBR 2 conformance definition Policed VBR3 atmCLPTaggingScrCdvt This traffic descriptor type is for CLP with tagging and Sustained Cell Rate and CDVT This t
230. results in POTS service to the affected subscribers but there is still no ADSLx service to them follow Procedure 2 to troubleshoot ADSLx service problems WR If this step results in ADSL service to the affected subscribers but there is still no POTS service to them follow Procedure 3 to troubleshoot POTS service problems 2 Use a bridging connector to couple the POTS and subscriber lines If this results in POTS service to the affected subscribers contact your distributor 3 Check the condition of the subscriber lines and connectors 374 gt PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Conformit For the following equipment Type of Product 24 Port IP DSLAM Model Number IDL 2402 Produced by Manufacturer s Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 11F No 96 Min Chuan Road Hsin Tien Taipei Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility 89 336 EEC Amended by 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC amp 98 12 EC For the evaluation regarding the Electromagnetic Compatibility the following standards were applied EN 300 386 V1 3 3 2005 EN 55022 1998 A1 2000 A2 2003 Class A EN 61000 3 2 2000 Class A EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 2001 EN 61000 4 2 1995 A1 1998 A2 2001 EN 61000 4 3 1996 A1 1998 A2 200
231. ring type value Max 63 characters Default value Type Optional 213 5 1 12 system name Description Set system name Syntax system name lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt System name Valid values string type value Max 32 characters Default value Type Optional 5 1 13 system restart Description Restart the system Syntax system restart Parameter None 214 5 2 Initialize Mode Commands 5 2 1 enable Description Syntax Parameter 5 2 2 show license Description Syntax Parameter 5 2 3 show time Description Syntax Parameter 5 2 4 show uptime Description Syntax Parameter 5 2 5 show version Description Syntax Parameter Go to Enable execution mode from disable mode enable None Display GNU software license show license None Display current time show time None Display System up time and CPU loading show uptime None Display CLI software version show version None 215 5 3 Enable Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Enable execution mode 5 3 1 configure Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 2 ping Description Syntax Parameter Go to Configure execution mode from Enable mode configure None ICMP echo and reply from hostname address or IP address If no reply for a long time you can press Ctrl c to interrupt ping ping ipv4 address ping ipv4 a
232. ription lt ipv4 address gt IP address of TFTP server Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx Default value Type Mandatory xxx 0 255 lt filename gt Path and File name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 104 runningcfg write partition Write running configuration to memory runningcfg write partition lt number gt Description Description Syntax Parameter Name lt number gt Partition number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 105 snmp lt index gt community Description Syntax Parameter Set SNMP read only or read write community string snmp lt index gt community ro rw lt community gt Name Description 276 lt index gt SNMP community index Valid values 1 32 Default value Type Mandatory lt community gt 5 4 106 snmp notify Community string max 31 character note that community names beginning with a digital number are not allowed Default value public Type Mandatory DescriptionSet SNMP notify information Delete SNMP notify tag snmp notify lt name gt tag lt tag gt delete Description Notify name string max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory Syntax Parameter Name lt name gt lt tag gt Notify Tag string max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 107 snmp target lt name gt addres
233. rmation Syntax show profile rate limit policer Parameter None 239 5 3 92 show profile service adsl Description Display ADSL service profile Syntax show profile service adsl lt number gt all Parameter Name Description lt number gt Profile index Valid values 1 120 Default value Type Optional 5 3 93 show profile spectrum adsl Description Display ADSL service profile Syntax show profile service adsl lt number gt all Parameter Name Description lt number gt Profile index Valid values 1 120 Default value Type Optional 5 3 94 show profile tca adsl Description Display one specified threshold crossing alert profile or all profiles Syntax show profile tca adsl lt index gt all Parameter Name Description lt index gt Profile index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 240 5 3 95 show rmon alarm Description Display RMON alarm information Syntax show rmon alarm all lt number gt Parameter Name Description number RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 96 show rmon ether_history Description Display RMON Ether history information Syntax show rmon ether_history lt number gt Parameter Name Description number RMON index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 97 show rmon event Description Displa
234. roduct must comply with the applicable safety standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult for technical support A rare condition can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate building are interconnected the voltage potential can cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action before interconnecting the products If the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuit take the following precautions E Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm WH Never install telephone jacks in wet location unless the jack is specially designed for wet location m Never touch un insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface E Caution when installing or modifying telephone lines other than a cordless telephone during an electrical storm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning E Do not use a telephone or other equipment connected to telephone lines to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak BLR 2 2 Hardware Installation The PLANET IDL 2402 is a 1 5U high box type IP DSLAM with rack mountable enclosure It can be installed in a standard 19 inch rack by using the mounting brackets provided
235. rt 15min LOPWR threshold 15min LOL threshold Not support 15min ErrFrm threshold 15min ErrFrm threshold 24hour ES threshold 24hour ES threshold 24hour SES threshold 24hour SES threshold 24hour UAS threshold 24hour UAS threshold 51 3 3 1 RMON Feature The IDL 2402 supports performance statistics defined in RMON MIB groups 1 Ethernet statistics 2 history control 3 Ethernet history 4 alarm 5 event and 6 log per RFC 2819 for all network uplink 10 100 1000 ports The supported parameters are as follows Table 3 1 RMON ETH Statistics variables Variable Description Rx DropEvents Monitoring rx dropped packets Rx Bytes Monitoring rx bytes packets Rx Packet Monitoring rx packets Rx BroadcastPkts Monitoring rx broadcast packets Rx MulticastPkts Monitoring rx multicast packets Rx CRC Align Errors Monitoring rx error aligment packets Rx Undersize Pkts Monitoring rx undersize packets Rx Oversize Pkts Monitoring rx oversize packets Rx Fragments Monitoring rx fragments packets Rx Jabbers Monitoring rx jabber packets Tx Collisions Monitoring tx single collision packets Tx Rx Pkts 64bytes Monitoring tx rx 64 bytes Tx Rx Pkts 65 127bytes Monitoring tx rx 65 to 127 bytes Tx Rx Pkts 128 255bytes Monitoring tx rx 128 to 255 bytes Tx Rx Pkts 256 511 bytes Monitoring tx rx 256 t
236. ry type in new value and then click on Modify To delete an entry click on the index to select the entry and then click on Delete Remote Monitoring Event Select Typel Event Next No 4 Description Description4 Community Community4 RMON4 Event Type NONE x NeW Modify Delete Query E E E fcc d _RMONT RMON Event setup Label Description Description Type in comment describing the event If an SNMP trap is to be sent it will be sent to the SNMP community specified in Community R this column Owner Type in the RMON event owner Click on the drop down list and select event type Options are NONE LOG an Event Type entry is made in the log table for each event SNMPTRAP an SNMP trap is sent to one or more management stations LOGANDTRAP log and send trap LastTimeSent The value of System Up Time at the time this event entry last generated an event 202 LOG This option allows you to query the RMON LOG Click on Query button to display the log Only the event indices with LOG or LOGANDTRAP event type see previous section are possible to appear in the log Remote Monitoring LOG 203 4 6 7 5 ADSL Day Interval This option allows you to query the ADSL PM 15 Min and Day Statistics The IDL 2402 provides Today and Previous 1 day for Day PM and also provides Current and Previous 1 96 interval for 15 Min PM From the Maintenance menu click on Performance Moni
237. ry or maintenance protocols Query Click on this button to display current channels in the profile Create Click on this button to create new channels IGMP group address Delete Click on this button to delete channel s IGMP group address Binding Profile page gt IGMP ACL Profile BINDING PROFILE ADSL x Port 01 12 x pvc 1 DN Max Groups range form 1 to 126 Modity All select M Quickly Max Group Assign Quickly Profile ID Assign 01 lande Binding Assign oft D Assign rm d i Sus POU roe E PO crape E mo a Jm sien K e jonm E K mg Jo dia ki a ot Jott z Mo 12 Jo dia z K 8 Jon fot mo 8a fonzijo zlom o Jeu lan zl Poom 8 fonz Mo 8a fonmifot v MV a fo flo MV s8 jo x Jott IGMP ACL Profile Binding Label Description apse x Port 01 12 DN Pvc 1 DN Click on these drop down lists to select a line bridge port 134 Click on this checkbox to select all ports in this page at one time See This is convenient for quickly value assignment This field is for quick value assignment assign the same value to Quickly Max Group Assign all the ports in current page at one time Type in the maximum IGMP groups can be joined simultaneously per line port and then click on Assign to put the value into the table Quickly Profile ID Assign Click on this drop down list to select the profile ID you
238. ry the History table click on the History Index drop down list and select a history table and then click on Query Remote Monitoring ETH History Select Typel ETH History z History index History1 7 _Query RMON ETH History Table Label Description HistIndex This field shows the History Table index The history identified by this index is the same history as identified by the same value of History Control index Samplelndex The Sample index uniquely identifies the particular Sample among all samples associated with the same History Control entry IntervalStart The value of System Up Time at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured System Up Time is the time since the network management portion of the system was last re initialized 197 RMON ETH History variables Variable Description Rx DropEvents Monitoring Rx dropped packets Rx Bytes Monitoring Rx bytes packets Rx Packets Monitoring Rx packets Rx Broadcast Pkts Monitoring Rx broadcast packets Rx Multicast Pkts Monitoring Rx multicast packets Rx CRC Align Errors Monitoring Rx error alignment packets Rx Undersize Pkts Monitoring Rx undersize packets Rx Oversize Pkts Monitoring Rx oversize packets Rx Fragments Monitoring Rx fragments packets Rx Jabbers Monitoring Rx jabber packets Tx Collisions Monitoring Tx single collision pa
239. s address snmp target lt name gt address lt ipv4 address gt port lt port gt Description Description Set SNMP target Syntax Parameter Name lt name gt SNMP target name Valid values max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Target IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt SNMP target port Valid values 1 65535 277 Default value 162 Type Mandatory 5 4 108 snmp target lt name gt delete Description Delete SNMP target tag list Syntax snmp target lt name gt delete Parameter Name Description lt name gt SNMP target name Valid values max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 109 snmp target lt name gt tag list Description Set SNMP target tag list Syntax snmp target lt name gt tag list lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt SNMP target name Valid values max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt SNMP target tag list Valid values max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 110 snmp target lt name gt version Description Set SNMP target trap version to V1 or V2C Syntax snmp target lt name gt version v1 v2c Parameter Name Description lt name gt SNMP target name Valid values max 31 characters Default value
240. s 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 50 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds gain Description Display carrier information of near end gain downstream by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds gain Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 228 5 3 51 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds tss Description Display carrier information of near end tss downstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds tss Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 52 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl channel Description Display xDSL line channel information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl channel Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 53 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl failure Description Display xDSL failure by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl failure Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type
241. s on default VLAN of this bridge port Both Combine the rules of Ingress and Egress Select the check box to copy specified circuit to all remainder circuits in current Al page Modif Click on the radio button to select the bridge port you want to modify Change y the parameter values and then click on Modify Query Click on this button to get the most recent data 89 4 3 1 4 ADSL Port Security This option allows you to setup the ADSL port security From the Bridge menu click on Interface Setup and then ADSL Port Security The following page is displayed fe 2 Gi s 2 2 9 2 2 9 Mamac 4 mac Learning Enabled D IP Allowed Disabled D ALL TI Modify RER iv ADSL PwC CONFIGURATION STATIC VLAN ADSL Port Security You shall click on the drop down lists to select port range and PVC first Then the data of these PVCs bridge ports you selected will be displayed Click on the radio button to select the bridge port you want to modify ADSL Port Security Setup Label Description Max MAC Type in the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the ADSL bridge port 1 128 MAC Learning Select to enable disable MAC learning ability Sometimes you can disable MAC learning on specified bridge port This function is for 1 1 VLAN translation scenario IP Allowed Select to enable disable IP Allowed function When you enable IP Allowe
242. s you must not turn off or reset the system during the process 1 Warning Upgrading firmware may take a few minutes please don t turn off or reset the system 2 Once the system has upgraded already please restart it 181 Firmware Write successfully When the Flash Write process has completed successfully the Firmware Update Status shows Firmware has upgraded already You can now restart the system Firmware Update Firmware Update Firmware Partition Select Partition 2 x Once system has 2 versions an operator can use Partition Select from 1 to 2 vice versa e g Parition changes from version 4 ato version B b Current Version 1 00B05 1 Warning Upgrading firmware may take a few minutes please don t turn off or reset the system 2 0nce the system has upgraded already please restart it 182 4 7 4 ATM Loopbacks This option allows you to modify the ATM F4 F5 entries or send the diagnostic entry From the Maintenance menu click on ATM Loopbacks The following page is displayed ATM Loopback OAM Cell Generation Disabled Enabled Apply Port 01 12 Di pvc 1 x Create Query Delete rer xl J select zl seect Zl zo l J select Zl setect zl ATM Loopbacks Setup Label Description OAM Cell Generation Click on the radio button to Disable Enable OAM Cell Generation Then click on Apply button to submit the setting Port 0112
243. s VLAN stack VLAN cross connect etc Before you configure the Translation VLAN table for a line bridge port you shall configure the Static VLAN table for this line bridge port and the GIGA bridge port in advance Also you shall disable VLAN stacking feature of this line bridge port in the ADSL bridge interface setup page refer to section 4 3 1 otherwise the VLAN translation rule here will not take effect From the Bridge menu click on VLAN Configuration and then Translation VLAN The following page is displayed Click on the radio button to select translation Mode first Translation VLAN 4 1 User Mode 1 1 User Mode C_VLAN Stacking Replaced Mode C sTag ether type Ox 8100 Set Port Default VID VLAN ID List 1 158 ADSL Pot PVC Delete UPLINK Port UPLINK VID Create gt bh sl Select Select Select sl GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Actually the IDL 2402 provides five translation modes four for 1 1 VLAN one for N 1 VLAN refer to DSL Forum TR 101 1 1 VLAN including 1 1 User Mode and C_VLAN Stacking Replaced Mode If the ADSL user bridge port only has 1 1 VLAN then MAC learning function of this bridge port can be disabled 1 Reserved In this mode the system does not make any change on C Tag That is the uplink port s S Tag is actually the C Tag The system provides a tunnel for the user port and uplink port And one VLAN ID can only make one tunnel 2
244. scription profile index Profile index Valid values 2 120 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 71 profile tca xdsl Description Enter this command to go to TCA profile configuration mode or delete the specified TCA profile Syntax profile tca xdsl lt index gt disable Parameter Name Description lt index gt TCA profile index Valid values 2 64 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 72 profile rate limit Description Enter this command to go to rate limit profile configuration mode Syntax profile tca xdsl lt index gt disable Parameter None 264 5 4 73 remotecfg login Description Login FTP server to get remote configuration and load it to running configuration or write remote configuration to memory Syntax remotecfg login lt ipv4 address gt get lt filename gt load write partition lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IP address of TFTP server Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx Xxx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory lt filename gt Remote path and file name max 31 character Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Partition number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 74 restore factory Description Restore factory setting User needs to restart the system after restore factory to make the setting take effect Syntax restore factory Parameter None 5 4 75 rmon alarm lt in
245. scription lt number gt IGMP ACL channel index Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt IGMP group address Valid values 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 The range of addresses from 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 is reserved for the use of routing protocols and other low level topology discovery or maintenance protocols Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 16 2 igmp acl rebind Description IGMP ACL Profile rebind Syntax igmp acl rebind Parameter None 348 5 17 Rate Limit Profile Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Rate Limit Profile execution mode 5 17 1 share slb Description Set share SLB Single Leaky Bucket Delete the share SLB profile Syntax share slb lt number gt cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt disable Parameter Name Description number Share SLB profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt Cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory 5 17 2 share dib Description Set share DLB Dual Leaky Bucket Delete the share DLB profile Syntax share dlb lt number gt cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt eir
246. splay xDSL inventory by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl inventory Name Description Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 5 3 59 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl operational Description Syntax Parameter Display xDSL far end near end operational information by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl operational fe ne Name Description Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 231 5 3 60 show interface xdsl all lt port gt bridge Description Display Bridge information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt bridge Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 61 show interface xdsl all lt port gt cellcount Description Display ATM cell counter by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt cellcount Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 62 show interface xdsl all lt port gt counter Description Display Ethernet packet counter by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt counter Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Def
247. st Port 2 Diagnostics Run Diagnostics Abort Duoi ween Port sates ee Carrier Type TSS SNR C anO HLIN Hoer 3275 3275 3275 3275 325 325 325 325 3275 3275 3275 3275 325 325 325 3275 325 325 325 392 3723 BH ABS A552 AGS 5145 S5545 5916 6510 6747 7195 7655 O B E E EE E E o E Cie 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 327639 32763 32769 32769 32763 32769 32763 32769 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 Sayre ren en en e sre sre a en 526 370 7 EEEE E ESE 37 7 E E SE 37 Pa e e e 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 ni 7 con cen se sre sre on en Se re re E E E e e ST EL SR crn con sen sre sre sre ea en Se sre sre a en Se 376 ST e ST a E EEEE EEEE 32763 32763 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32768 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 SEEE zen sre sre Se EEEE EE 9 E E ST 7 9 SE SE 37 57 9 EN SE 37 SP 6 EL ELEL ma son sense sre sre a en en re sre E en en Se 376 37 E Se re SP 69 E E ELELE eS re Se 32763
248. st cadt sadt eadt nzt nzst idle nzat GMT 08 00 West Australian Daylight Time GMT 08 00 WST GMT 09 00 Japan Standard Time GMT 09 00 Korean Standard Time GMT 09 30 Central Australian Standard Time GMT 09 30 South Australian Standard Time GMT 10 00 JDT GMT 10 00 Guam Standard Time GMT 10 00 East Australian Standard Time GMT 10 30 Central Austrlian Daylight Time GMT 10 30 South Australian Daylight Time GMT 11 00 East Australian Daylight Time GMT 12 00 New Zealand Time GMT 12 00 New Zealand Standard Time GMT 12 00 International Date Line East GMT 13 00 New Zealand Daylight Time 5 4 125 vlan ethertype s tag Set VLAN S Tag Ether Type value vlan ethertype s tag lt number gt Description Description Syntax Parameter Name lt number gt S Tag Ether type value Valid values 0x0001 Oxffff Default value 0x8100 Type Mandatory 5 4 126 vlan protocol base Description Set Protocol Based VLAN table Delete the specified entry from Protocol Based VLAN table vlan protocol base lt index gt ethertype lt number gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt Description Protocol Based VLAN table index Valid values 1 32 Default value Type Mandatory Ether type value Valid values 0x0001 Oxffff Default value Type Mandatory Syntax disable Parameter Name lt index gt lt number gt lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094
249. st srcemac lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Source MAC address priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 85 show priority list tos Description Display ToS IP Precedence priority list Syntax show priority list tos lt number gt Parameter Name Description number ToS IP Precedence priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory 238 5 3 86 show priority list vlanid Description Display VLAN ID priority list Syntax show priority list vianid lt number gt Parameter Name Description number VLAN ID priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 87 show priority queue config Description Display Priority and Queue mapping configuration Syntax show priority queue config Parameter None 5 3 88 show priority regen Description Display VLAN priority tag filter Syntax show priority regen Parameter None 5 3 89 show profile alarm all Description Display alarm profile Syntax show profile alarm all Parameter None 5 3 90 show profile igmp acl Description Display IGMP ACL profile Syntax show profile igmp acl lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Profile index Valid values 1 15 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 91 show profile rate limit policer Description Display rate limit policer info
250. supports 24 ports ADSL subscribers per box There are two RJ21 50 pin female connectors on the front panel of the system One for ADSL line and one for POTS interface To connect the subscriber lines use cables with the RJ21 50 pin male connectors When installing just plug the end of a cable with connector into the LINE and PHONE interface female connector on the front panel The other end of the cable is generally tied to the MDF Main Distribution Frame The pin assignment of LINE PHONE interface is illustrated below the numbers in the connector figures below represent PIN numbers For port 1 24 25 1 50 26 PIN Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Port Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip 8 Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip x Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 PIN Number 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 S 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Port Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring 8 Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring x Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Z 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Note The MDF Patch panel is optional of standard package Note Please plug in the RJ 21 cable with connector Tenon as below figure Line Strip Connector Tenon A Si St 24 Front Panel Connection a ae Ra nage E El hA sta so Console Uplink Cabi PHONE Switch Exchange PABX g Workstatio
251. t Setup Modify Admin ON e AutoNegotiate e Ethernet Port Service Setup Label Description Port This field shows port number of the Gigabit Ethernet interface Admin Status Click on the drop down list and select the administrative state ON OFF to enable disable the GBE port Click on the drop down list and select the speed mode for trunk Selected Speed GBE port Supported options are AutoNegotiate 100Mbps Half duplex 100Mbps Full duplex Link Status Show operational status of the trunk ports ON OFF Current Speed Show current speed mode of the trunk ports Current Media Show current uplink transmission medium via copper or SFP This field will show N A when Oper Status is OFF Modify Click on this button to submit the modification 64 4 1 4 ADSL Port Service This option allows you to setup the service status of the line ports and to bind the selected service profiles and spectrum profiles Also you can query current setting and the operational status of the line ports From the System menu click on ADSL Port Service The following page is displayed First click on the drop down list to select the port range to be displayed Remember to click on the radio button to select a port to be modified or select the All checkbox to modify all ports of the page at a time ADSL Circuit Service AdminJON zl Service Profile 1 Spectrum Profile
252. t number gt Cluster voting key Valid values 0 4294967295 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 4 17 dot1x Description Go to 802 1x configuration mode Syntax dotix Parameter None 5 4 18 dot1x disable Description disable 802 1x authentication function of the system Syntax dotix disable Parameter None 5 4 19 dot1x enable Description Enable 802 1x authentication function of the system Syntax dotix enable Parameter None 5 4 20 dsl line identify dhcp Description Set DHCP Relay Option82 enable disable Syntax dsl line identify dhcp enable disable Parameter None 5 4 21 dsl line identify dhcp option82 circuit Description Set DHCP Option82 Circuit ID type default type is lt DSLAM name gt lt circuit number gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt or customer defined type Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 circuit default customer Parameter None 251 5 4 22 dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name Description Set DSLAM name Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt Set DSLAM name max length 15 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 23 dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name cluster Description Set DSLAM name by Cluster name Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name cluster Parameter None 5 4 24 dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name customer Description Set DSLAM name by customer defined Syntax dsl line ide
253. t prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt mac lt mac address gt scrmac lt numbers list scrmac lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Source mac priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt mac address gt MAC address Valid values xx xx Xx xx xx xx xx 0 ff Default value 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Mandatory 5 14 14 sremac list Description Show source MAC priority list Syntax srcmac list Parameter None 342 5 14 15 tos Description Specify ToS IP Precedence of packets to remark vian priority Show Syntax Parameter ToS IP Precedence priority list entry Disable ToS IP Precedence priority list entry tos lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt precedence lt tos gt tos lt numbers gt list tos lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt ToS IP Precedence priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory
254. t the ADSL2 2 CPE to Patch Panel and configure it the VPI VCI value must be the same with IDL 2402 After finish setting the CPE will establish the ADSL connection with IDL 2402 You can check the connection status as below figure The Current Status is ON Admin ON Y Service Profile 1 Spectrum Profie 1 tcaprotie 1 Laf The Service Profile range from 1 to 120 The Spectrum Profile range from 1 to 120 The TCA Profile range from 1 to 64 Potom v s o o deblalblelolalalelel t D o FF OFF 1 1 11 OFF OFF 1 4 1 SERVICE PROFILE SPECTRUM PROFILE TCA PROFILE Now the clients can access to Internet through IDL 2402 Step 6 Save the running configuration to Flash Remember to save your running configuration to the flash or the settings will be lost if you power off IDL 2402 Go to Maintenance gt Database setting screen select the D Save Running Config to Flash System Config There are two partitions on flash select your Partition which you want to save and click Write Running The configuration will save to the Flash Maintenance gt gt Database Cluster Main Unit V amp Contig Sele d D Save Running Contig to Flash System Contig a oo ee RS e IP DSLAM Terms and conditions Copyright 2007 Li a Note Default Partition is Partition1 31 2 3 3 How to backup
255. t to the Following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this Device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation CE mark Warning The is a class A device In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Trademarks The PLANET logo is a trademark of PLANET Technology This documentation may refer to numerous hardware and software products by their trade names In most if not all cases these designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks by their respective companies WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of zs the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment A end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning N ofthe crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted E Municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Safety This equipment is designed with the utmost care for the safety of those who install and use it However special attention must be paid to the dangers of electric shock and static electricity when working with electrical equipment All guidelines of this and of the computer manufacture must therefore be allowed at all times to ensure the safe use of the equipment Revision User s Ma
256. t value Type Mandatory lt mac address gt Destination MAC address Valid values xx xx Xx xx xx xx xx 00 ff Default value 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Mandatory Display destination MAC deny access list dstmac list None Specify destination IP address of packets to filter Show specified destination IP deny access list entry Delete specified destination IP deny access list entry dstip lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt ip lt ipv4 address gt lt netmask gt dstip lt number gt list dstip lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Destination IP deny access list number Valid values 1 256 317 5 12 6 dstip list Description Syntax Parameter 5 12 7 ethertype Description Syntax Parameter Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Destination IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt netmask gt Subnet mask Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value Type Optional Display destination IP deny access list dstip list None Specify Ether Type of packets to filter Show specified Ether T
257. ter member the cluster will be reconstructed cluster state Discovering gt Voting gt Master or Slave If you modify the Role to Individual Cluster State will show IDLE The DSLAM is not in a cluster now If you are directly connecting to a Slave in the cluster connecting via its in band IP address you cannot switch to any other member in the cluster 70 4 1 7 System Inventory This option allows you to retrieve the system inventory including Description of the System HW FW SW Version Model Information Part Number Hardware Revision and Serial Number From the System menu click on System Inventory Click on the Query button The following page is displayed 71 4 1 8 System Contact Info This option allows you to specify the system name system contact and system location From the System menu click on System Contact Info The following page is displayed System Contact Information IDL 2402 _Moaity O A Type in the value you desire and then click on Modify to apply the setting Click on Query to verify if the value is changed 72 4 1 9 SNTP This option allows you to setup the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP From the System menu click on SNTP The following page is displayed Simple Network Time Protocol 25 0 0 GMT Greenwich Mean Time bud 2008 o 04 0 15 02 600 ei 6 115 8 SNTP Setup Label Description Sets the local time zone
258. th the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval SampleType DELTA the value of the selected variable at the last sample will be subtracted from the current value and the difference compared with the thresholds 199 Set the alarm type that may be sent Options are Rising Falling and Both Rising or Both If the first sample after this entry becomes valid is greater than or equal to the Rising Threshold then a single rising alarm will be StartupAlarm generated Falling or Both If the first sample after this entry becomes valid is less than or equal to the Falling Threshold then a single falling alarm will be generated Value This field shows the value of the monitored data Rising Threshold RMON alarm rising threshold 0 4294967295 Falling Threshold RMON alarm falling threshold 0 4294967295 Rising Event Index This index is used when a rising threshold is crossed You must refer to the index of RMON Event table If there is no corresponding entry in the Event table then no association exists Falling Event Index This index is used when a falling threshold is crossed You must refer to the index of RMON Event table If there is no corresponding entry in the Event table then no association exists Following figure shows an example of RMON alarm for ABSOLUTE sample type As shown in the figure the counting value keeps increasing But when the value overflows the
259. the line because of detection of a persistent defect ATUC_FailedInitCounter The number of times the modem tries to initialize the line but fails 50 ATUC_CU User Total Cell Count ATUC_CD Delineated Total Cell Count ATUC_HEC ATM Header Error Count ATUC_IBE Idle Cell Bit Error Count ATUC_CVS The counter associated with the number of Coding Violations encountered by the channel ATUC_FECCS The counter associated with the number of corrected codewords encountered by the channel ATUR_LOS Far End Loss of signal count ATUR_LOF Far End Loss of frame count ATUR_LOM Far End Loss of margin count ATUR_LPR Far End Loss of power count ATUR_ES Far End Errored Seconds ATUR_SES Far End Severely Errored Seconds ATUR_UAS Far End Unavailable Seconds ATUR_HEC Far End ATM Header Error Count ATUR_IBE Far End Idle Cell Bit Error Count ATUR_CVS The far end counter associated with the number of Coding Violations encountered by the channel ATUR_FECCS The far end counter associated with the number of corrected code words encountered by the channel The IDL 2402 provides the following ADSL PM thresholds NE threshold FE threshold 15min ES threshold 15min ES threshold 15min SES threshold 15min SES threshold 15min UAS threshold 15min UAS threshold 15min LOS threshold 15min LOS threshold 15min LOF threshold Not support Not suppo
260. the target setting 170 4 6 3 SNMP Notify This option allows you to setup the SNMP Notification In SNMPv1 asynchronous event reports are called traps while they are called notifications in later versions of SNMP From the SNMP menu click on SNMP Notify The following page is displayed SNMP Notify Next No 3 New Delete Modify Notify well Query Modify Delete 123_Tag Table 0 2 SNMP Community Setup Label Description Notify No This field shows the Notify number you select Click on this button to create a new SNMP Notify After you click on New the following page is displayed Type in the name and tag of the SNMP Notify and click on Apply button By specifying the Notify tag you can bind the Notify name to the SNMP target address table When the Notify tag is the same with the Target Tag in a SNMP target table refer to previous section the notification is sent to the corresponding Target address New SNMP Notify Apply Back SnmpNotityName3 SnmpNotifyTag3 Delete Select a row and then click on this button to delete a Notify Select the row and type in new notify tag and then click on this button to submit the Modify modification 2471 4 7 Maintenance 4 7 1 SYS Log Server This option allows you to configure the IP address of the SYS Log server which listens for incoming Syslog messages From the Maintenance menu click on SYS Log Server The follow
261. ting disabled reserve the original priority of all packets egress force the priority value of all packets sent out from this bridge port s default VLAN to be the default VLAN priority so this rule only works on default VLAN of this bridge port ingress force applying the default VLAN priority value to all the packets received on this bridge port so this rule will work on all the member set of this bridge port both combine the rules of Ingress and Egress Syntax force priority disable engress ingress both Parameter None 5 7 14 igmp acl bind Description IGMP ACL Access Control List binding profile configuration Syntax igmp acl bind lt number gt on on off reset Parameter Name Description lt number gt IGMP ACL profile index Valid values 1 15 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 7 15 igmp acl max group Description Per port limit IGMP join group number Syntax igmp acl max group lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt IGMP ACL profile index Valid values 1 128 Default value 8 Type Mandatory 293 5 7 16 ingress Description Syntax Parameter Enable disable ingress filter mode ingress enable disable None 5 7 17 interim interval Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 18 ip allowed Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 19 isolation Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 20 mac learning Descri
262. tion Rate 1536 1G bits per second controls the number of tokens in the second bucket EBS bucket 1 LBS 15t Leaky Bucket Size The unit is millisecond This parameter ranges from 1 to 1024 The first bucket depth is the product of CIR and this parameter 2 Leaky Bucket Size The unit is millisecond This parameter ranges 2 LBS from 1 to 1024 The second bucket depth is the product of EIR and this parameter Modify Click on this button to modify an entry in the rate limit table Query Click on this button to retrieve the entries in the table Delete Click on this button to delete the entries in the table 122 H Rate Limit Policer Binding Table The Rate Limit Policer Binding Table allows you to specify which Policer profile to bind and the binding status for a trunk or line bridge port Rate Limit Typel Policer Binding Table x eca D Modify Query Rate Limit Policer Binding Table Rate Limit Policer Binding Setup Label Description Rate Limit Type Click on this drop down list and select the item you want to setup cica zl Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Modif Once you have finished setting the parameter values click on this y button to submit the modification Query Click on this button to get most recent data Select Remember to select the checkbox when you want to modify this entry Policer No Click on the drop down list a
263. to restore factory default configuration Database Configuration DB Config Select F Restore Factory Default x Factory Default After loading default configuration to Flash successfully you must click on RESTART button to restart the system so that the configuration can take effect Database Configuration DB Config Select F Restore Factory Default D Factory Default 178 G Flash Boot Point Configuration Select Click on the Boot Config drop down list and select the partition Partition1 or Partition2 as the boot point Click on Apply button and then restart the system The system will restart and load the configuration in the partition you select into the running configuration Database Configuration DB Config Select G Flash Boot Point Configuration Select Current DB Boot Point Partition2 Boot Config Partition Y Active DB Ay FLASH DEVICE oO IMAGE FILE 1 Partition Boot Point Selector e lt O System Configuration oO IMAGE FILE 2 System Configuration 179 4 7 3 Firmware Update This option allows you to ftp get the firmware from a server and write to flash for updating the system firmware From the Maintenance menu click on Firmware Update The following page is displayed een Geer an operator can use Partition Select from 1 to 2 vice versa 9 Parition changes from version 4 a to version B b 1 Warning Upgrading firmware may take a few minut
264. toring and then ADSL Day Interval The following page is displayed You can select to display one interval or all intervals data of a single port you can also select to display one interval data for twelve ports 1 12 13 24 at the same time ADSL Performance Statistics More Port 01 12 SI Port 1 D ALL Interval l Query Clearing current interval PM Clear PM Portl TCA PROFILE 15 Min Previous PM number between 1 and 96 ADSL PM Statistics Label Description l Click on the drop down list and select the port range Options are More Port 01 12 13 24 This drop down list is available only when All is selected in the Port drop down list 204 Click on the drop down list and select a line port number 1 24 You can Port also select All and then click on More Port to select a port range to view the data of twelve ports at the same time All Interval When you select to view a single port PM data you can click on this checkbox to display the data of all intervals Query Click on this button to get most recent data Clear PM Click on this button to clear current PM data of the port you select LOS Loss of Signal LOF Loss of Frame LOM Loss of Margin LPR Loss of Power only for Far End LOL Loss of Link only for Near End ES Errored Seconds SES Severely Errored Seconds UAS Unavailable Seconds Re Initialize Modem Re initialization events only for
265. tory 5 4 117 tem non conform pkt Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 118 tem red Description Syntax Parameter Set the action for non conforming packets discard or tag If Tag is selected then all the packets will be marked as green yellow or red in the Color field tcm non conform pkt discard tag None Set TCM red color value tcm red lt number gt Name Description lt number gt TCM red color value Valid values 0 7 for VLAN priority color field 0 63 for DSCP color field Default value 7 Type Mandatory 280 5 4 119 tem yellow Description Set TCM yellow color value Syntax tcm yellow lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt TCM yellow color value Valid values 0 7 for VLAN priority color field 0 63 for DSCP color field Default value 3 Type Mandatory 5 4 120 temperature threshold Description Shelf temperature threshold Syntax temperature threshold up down fan lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Temperature threshold value Valid values up 55 85 Down 55 85 fan 40 15 Default value up 65 down 65 fan 40 Type Mandatory 5 4 121 temperature shelf time Description Shelf time Syntax temperature shelf time up down lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Shelf time value Valid values 1 255 Default value 10 Type
266. ty list ercmarc 238 E OO SMOW elen TE te EE 238 5 3 86 show priority list vlanid EE 239 5 3 87 show priority queue config EEN 239 5 39 88 SNOW priorit re gE RE 239 5 3 89 show profile alarm al 239 5 3 90 show profile igmp acl EE 239 5 3 91 show profile rate limit policer oo eee cece eeeeeeteee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 239 5 3 92 show profile service EE EE 240 5 3 93 show profile spectrum adi 240 5 3 94 show profile tca adsl EEN 240 5 3 95 show rmon alarm EE 241 5 3 96 show rmon SINS 2 PISEONY sce cues eens cave cone cedsanad conacawe codeenetdudecmnmendernenceduty 241 EENHEETEN 241 5 3 98 show rmon hiStory 25 2 eege eegene eg 241 DS Ee nen OO DEE 242 5 3 100 show rmon statistic 20 0 cc ccc cecceccceccecceeececceeeceececaeeceecaceceeceeeaeeneesaees 242 By OV lee 242 5 3 102 show ie elle WEE 242 5 3 103 show runningcfg interface goi0oabtt 242 5 3 104 show runningcfg interface sel 243 5 9 105 SNOW SNMP EEN 243 5 3106 SNOW SMP DE 243 5 3 107 show syslog E EE 243 EEN ee 243 Des TOD SHOW ICIT COMING EE 243 5 3 110 show tCM POliCer 2 0 2 ee cece eee eeeeeeee eect ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 243 5 3 111 show temperature nc faa nwa aa AeA sal eh asa Ses oe 244 9 912 SNOW TING E 244 E RE SHOW MUU EE 244 5 3 114 show version DEE 244 5 3 115 show version detail 244 E Ne EE 244 5 3 7 SNOW En Bt 245 5 3 118 show vlan Grotocolbase AAR 245 5 3 119 show vlan translation one to one cece eee eeeeeetee
267. ule for the packets From the Bridge menu click on Access Control and then Filtering The following page is displayed Click on Filtering Type drop down list to select a filtering type first Filtering Filtering Typel Select GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Protocol Filtering Protocol Filtering Filtering Typel Protocol z No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL D Port 1 z Pvc 1 D NextNo 2 Protocol 01 ICMP D Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Protocol Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number No From To value 1 256 Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to anay display the filter rules 100 Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter rules in the table ADSL D Ss slpvc3 D Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Protocol Click on this drop down list and select a protocol to deny ICMP IGMP IP in IP TCP GRP IGP UDP GRE EIGRP or OSPF Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table Source MAC Filtering Source MAC Filtering Filtering Typel Source MAC D No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256
268. umber gt Maximum number of the MAC addresses Valid values 1 128 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 295 5 7 24 port control auto Description Auto default Syntax Set to the system default authentication state for the port Parameter none 5 7 25 port control force authorized Description Force this port authorized state Syntax port control force authorized Parameter none 5 7 26 port control force unauthorized Description Force this port unauthorized state Syntax port control force unauthorized Parameter none 5 7 27 priority regen Description VLAN priority value regeneration or Delete VLAN priority tag filter Syntax priority regen incoming lt incoming prio gt outgoing lt outgoing prio gt disable Parameter Name Description lt incoming Incoming VLAN priority value prio gt Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt outgoing prio gt Outgoing VLAN priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 5 7 28 protocol base Description Enable disable protocol based VLAN Syntax protocol base enable disable Parameter None 296 5 7 29 pvc Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 30 pvc atmdesc Description Syntax Parameter Set VPI and VCI pvc lt VPI gt lt VClI gt Name Description lt VPI gt Virtual Path Identifier Valid values 0 255 Default value 0 Type Mandatory lt VCI gt Virtua
269. ure runningcfg write partition lt number gt E Reload Flash data to the Running config Ex enable configure runningcfg load partition lt number gt F Set system configuration current boot point to factory default value Ex enable configure restore factory G Select Configuration Flash Boot Point Ex enable configure runningcfg active partition lt number gt 33 For Web On the menu tree click on Maintenance gt Database The Database Configuration page is displayed Select the database configuration action you want to perform Database Configuration DB Contig Select Select x A Import File Write Download Config To Flash Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download Then click on Get File button Database Configuration DB Config Select Ajlmport File Arite Download Config To FLASH D TFTP Server p 172 16 10 241 File Name Config Get File Write downloaded Config to Flash in progress Database Configuration DB Config Select A lmport File Arite Download Contig To FLASH 7 TFTP Server p 172 16 10 241 File Name ef Get File 34 Write to memory successfully Database Configuration Ajlmport File Arite Download Config To FLASH e ba zeel Fail to Get File A lmport File Gite Download Config To FLASH vw e EH 35 B Import File Load Remote Config to Running Con
270. uster must all be in band connected through the GBE port It uses star topology for conducting a Clustering Management group Master Slave Slave IDL 2402 IDL 2402 IDL 2402 ess Uplink Uplink LAN GBE Uplink Cluster network topology Star From the System menu click on Cluster Setup The following page is displayed Cluster Setup Cluster Configuration Modify Query Individual By default the DSLAM is not in a cluster The state of the Cluster Configuration shows IDLE and the Role shows Individual 68 To make the DSLAM join a cluster select the Role as Cluster or Slave only according to your plan and then click on Modify The state of the Cluster Configuration will show from DISCOVERING to VOTING to MASTER or SLAVE at last Cluster Setup Cluster Configuration Modify Query The following figure shows the Cluster Setup page of a cluster containing two cluster members You will see the following page if you re connecting directly to the Master via its in band IP address or connecting to the Cluster IP 172 16 77 88 You can control all the IP DSLAMs ina cluster by connecting to the Cluster IP address or by directly connecting to the Master IPDSLAM via its in band IP address that is configured in the Board IP Setup page refer to section 4 1 2 Cluster Setup Cluster Configuration Modify Query Cluster Setup Label Description Na
271. uthenticated Enable Management capable KC Configure Configuration capable conf Interface Interface configure capable intf conf Ethernet Ethernet Interface configure capable ethernet intf conf Interface ATM Bridge ATM Bridge configuration capable bridge atm conf ATM Description ATM Description configuration capable atm desc conf ADSL config ADSL line configuration capable adsl intf conf IPOA config IPoA routed mode configuration ipoa intf conf capable Bridge Bridge configuration capable bridge eth conf Access List ACL configuration capable acl conf Service Profile User Line service profile configuration capable service profile Spectrum Profile User Line spectrum profile configuration capable spectrum profile Alarm Profile User Line alarm profile configuration alarm profile capable Tea Profile User Line tca profile configuration tca profile capable IGMP ACL IGMP ACL profile configuration igmpacl profile Profile capable Rate Limit Profile Rate Limit Policer profile configuration capable rate limit profile Priority List Priority List configuration capable prio conf 208 Getting help The user can get help in two ways The first is by using the help command The user can also enter a question mark at each position in the command The displayed result depends on the execution mode and
272. v4 address gt lt netmask gt dstip lt number gt list dstip lt number gt disable 335 Parameter 5 14 4 dstip list Description Syntax Parameter Name Description lt number gt Destination IP address priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt lt port gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Destination IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt netmask gt Subnet mask Valid values xxx XXX XXX XXX Xxx 0 255 Default value Type Optional Show destination IP address priority list dstip list None 336 5 14 5 dstmac Description Syntax Parameter Specify dest MAC of packets to remark vlan priority Show dest MAC priority list entry Disable dest MAC priority list entry dstmac lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt mac lt mac address gt dstmac lt number gt list dstmac lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Destination MAC priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory
273. wfq Parameter None 262 5 4 66 priority queue gigabit priority Description Set gigabit interface priority queue mapping Syntax priority queue atm priority lt prio ID gt queue lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory lt number gt Priority queue value Valid values 0 3 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 67 profile alarm Description Enter this command to go to alarm profile configuration mode Syntax profile alarm Parameter None 5 4 68 profile igmp acl Description Enter this command to go to IGMP ACL profile configuration mode Syntax profile igmp acl lt profile index gt Parameter Name Description lt profile index gt Profile index Valid values 1 15 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 69 profile service adsl Description Enter this command to go to service profile configuration mode or delete a service profile Syntax profile service adsl lt profile index gt disable Parameter Name Description lt profile index gt Profile index Valid values 2 120 263 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 70 profile spectrum Description Enter this command to go to spectrum profile configuration mode or delete a spectrum profile Syntax profile spectrum adsl2 adsl2plus readsl2 lt profile index gt disable Parameter Name De
274. x show pm lt port gt adsl day lt number gt current Parameter Name Description port Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory number Day number Valid values 1 1 Default value Type Mandatory 235 5 3 76 show pm lt port gt adsl interval Description Display performance monitoring data for previous 1 96 intervals or current interval Syntax show pm lt port gt adsl interval lt number gt current Parameter Name Description port Port number Valid values 1 24 48 Default value Type Mandatory number Interval number Valid values 1 96 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 77 show port template parameter Description Display parameter mask That is display which profiles or function of the template port are selected to be duplicated to other ports Mask means selected Unmask means not selected Syntax show port template parameter Parameter None 5 3 78 show priority list ds Description Display differentiated services priority list Syntax show priority list ds lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Differentiate services priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 236 5 3 79 show priority list dstip Description Syntax Parameter Display destination IP address priority list show priority list dstip lt number gt Name Description
275. xx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 99 route default Description Set default route Syntax route default lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt Default route IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 100 route delete Description Delete routing from route table Syntax route delete lt ipv4 address gt netmask lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 101 runningcfg active partition Description There are two memory partitions for storing the configuration data This command allows you to select the flash boot point partition for next power on Syntax runningcfg active partition lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Partition number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 275 5 4 102 runningcfg load partition Load running configuration from memory runningcfg load partition lt number gt Description Description Syntax Parameter Name lt number gt Partition number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 103 runningcfg login Description Login FTP server Syntax Parameter runningcfg login lt ipv4 address gt put lt filename gt Name Desc
276. y RADIUS server to stop accounting for this port ON notify RADIUS server to start accounting for this port Default is OFF Accounting Interval Type in the interval 300 600 sec between accounting information updates Default is 300 sec Force unAuth cause the port to stay in the unauthorized state ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate Force Auth disable 802 1X authentication and cause the port to Port Control transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required Auto enable 802 1x authentication and cause the port to begin the authentication process from unauthorized state Max Request Type in the number of times our system will send authentication requests Authenication to Supplicant if no response from the Supplicant is received Default value is 2 ReAuthentication Control OFF disable re authentication after a period of time ON enable re authentication after a period of time Default is OFF Max Request Type in the number of times our system will send authentication ReAuthentication requests to the authentication server RADIUS if no response from the server is received Default value is 2 79 Timer Setting System Protocol g T i E E E E E E E M M M M ADSL PVC CONFIGURATION 80 System Protocol Setup Timer setting Label Description Port Authentication section Timer Setting
277. y RMON event information Syntax show rmon event all lt number gt Parameter Name Description number RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 98 show rmon history Description Display RMON history control information Syntax show rmon history all lt number gt Parameter Name Description number RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 2 241 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 99 show rmon log DescriptionDisplay RMON log Syntax show rmon log Parameter None 5 3 100 show rmon statistic Description Display RMON statistic information Syntax show rmon statistic all lt number gt Parameter Name Description number RMON statistic entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 101 show route Description Display GBE routing table and default gateway Syntax show route Parameter None 5 3 102 show runningcfg Description Display running config Syntax show runningcfg Parameter None 5 3 103 show runningcfg interface gigabit Description Display running config by Gigabit Ethernet interface Syntax show runningcfg interface gigabit lt port gt Parameter Name Description port Gigabit port number Valid values 1 Default value Type Mandatory 242 5 3 104 show runningcfg interface xdsl Description Display running config by XDS
278. y value for the ADSL line information Note that to modify an entry you must select the checkbox on the leftmost column before you click on Modify Once you have typed in the port number range click on this button to ouen display line information of these ports Identifier Type in the ADSL line identifier Up to 63 characters is allowed Phone No Type in the phone number Up to 63 characters is allowed Description Type in any comment of this line Up to 63 characters is allowed 164 4 5 Traffic 4 5 1 ATM Traffic Descriptor This option allows you to modify the traffic table From the Traffic menu click on ATM Traffic Descriptor The following page is displayed ATM Traffic Descriptor PCR CDVT 20000 10000 SCR MBS TYPE D D Policed Descriptor 2 Policed CBRjatm lt CLP gt lt Transparent gt NoSCR D Create ATM Traffic Descriptor Setup Label Description PCR PCR stands for Peak Cell Rate cells second CDVT CDVT stands for Cell Delay Variation Tolerance microseconds SCR SCR stands for Sustained Cell Rate cells second MBS MBS stands for Maximum Burst Size cells TYPE This field will show Shaped or Policed depending on the descriptor type you select Click on this drop down list and select a descriptor type After you select a descriptor type the corresponding parameters which are configurable will be displayed on the top Valid descriptor types a
279. yntax show version detail Parameter None 5 3 116 show vian Description Display bridge port member set Syntax show vlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Optional 244 5 3 117 show vian ethertype Description Show VLAN S Tag Ether type Syntax show vlan ethertype Parameter None 5 3 118 show vlan protocol base Description Display protocol based VLAN table Syntax show vlan ethertype Parameter None 5 3 119 show vian translation one to one Description Display one to one VLAN translation table Syntax show vian translation one to one Parameter None 5 3 120 show vian translation many to one Description Display many to one VLAN translation table Syntax show vian translation many to one Parameter None 5 3 121 telnet Description Telnet to a destination if you re connecting to the DSLAM through its console port this command is not provided Syntax telnet lt target address gt Parameter Name Description target address IPV4 address or hostname Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 122 traceroute Description Trace route and not use ICMP ECHO instead of UDP datagrams Syntax traceroute lt target address gt no_icmp Parameter Name Description target address IPV4 address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx Xxx 0 255 Default value Type
280. ype Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Allowed source IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx Xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt IP Allowed entry VLAN ID number Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Optional 5 12 10 ip allowed list Description Syntax Parameter 5 12 11 ipprotocol Description Syntax Parameter Display static IP allow access list ip allowed list None Specify IP Protocol of packets to reject Show specify IP protocol access list entry Delete specify IP protocol deny access list entry ipprotocol lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt protocol lt protocol gt ipprotocol lt number gt list ipprotocol lt number gt disable 320 Name Description lt number gt IP Protocol deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory protocol Input protocol name Valid values icmp ICMP Internet Control Message lt 1 gt igmp IGMP Internet Group Management lt 2 gt ipinip IP in IP encapsulation lt 4 gt tcp TCP Transmission Control lt
281. ype deny access list entry Delete specified Ether Type deny access list entry ethertype lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt type lt ethertype gt ethertype lt number gt list ethertype lt number gt disable 318 5 12 8 ethertype list Description Syntax Parameter 5 12 9 ip allowed Description Syntax Parameter Name Description lt number gt Ether Type deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL 1 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ethertype gt Ether Type value Valid values 0x0001 Oxffff Default value Type Mandatory Display Ether Type deny access list ethertype list None Specify allowed source IP adderss of packets to filter Show allowed IP access list entry Delete specified allowed IP from access list ip allowed lt number gt allow xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt srcip lt ipv4 address gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt ip allowed lt numbers gt list ip allwowed lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Static IP allow access list number 319 Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 24 48 for xDSL Default value T

Planet Technology IDL-2402 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents